United States        Office of Water       EPA 822-R-96-004
Environmental Protection    4304          July 1996
Agency



National Nutrient



Assessment Workshop





Proceedings

December 4-6, 1995

-------

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	                    Proceedings

                    National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                               December 4-6,1995
                                Washington,, B.C.

                                   Introduction

Nutrient overenrichment is one of the leading causes of water quality problems in the United
States.  The National Water Quality Inventory 1994 Report to Congress Executive Summary
cites nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorus) as one of the leading causes of water quality
impairment in our Nation's rivers, lakes, and estuaries. While nutrients are essential to the
health of aquatic ecosystems,  excessive nutrient loadings can result in the growth of aquatic
weeds and algae, leading to oxygen depletion, increased fish and macroinvertebrate mortality,
and other water quality and habitat impairments.

Over the years, the Environmental Protection Agency's Office of Water has issued a number
of technical guidance documents and supported the development of water quality simulation
models and load estimating models to assess the impacts of urban, rural, and mixed land use
activities on receiving waters.  In addition, some States currently have water quality standards
that incorporate criteria, primarily narrative, aimed at controlling problems associated with
overenrichment. However, in order for State and local agencies to better understand and
manage nutrient impacts to surface waters, additional work is required.

EPA established a Nutrient Task Force in July 1993 to gather existing data on nutrient
problems and currently available tools.  The Task Force recommended that EPA provide
additional assistance to States in developing and implementing appropriate  nutrient endpoints,
assessment methodologies, and models. The first step in carrying out the recommendations of
the Task Force was a nutrient assessment workshop, which was held in Washington, DC, on
December 4-6,  1995. The workshop was organized around plenary and breakout group
discussions on four major waterbody types: estuarine and coastal waters; lakes,
impoundments/reservoirs, and ponds; rivers and streams; and wetlands. Issue papers
describing the state-of-the science, gaps, and user needs in terms of nutrient assessment tools
and methodologies for each waterbody type were developed and used as foundations for group
discussion.

The primary goals of the workshop were to:

•      Identify the full range of potential nutrient overenrichment endpoints, including early
       warning indicators, assessment methodologies, and models available for application to
       various types of waterbodies,

•      Identify what gaps exist in providing a fall range of simple to complex nutrient
       overenrichment endpoints assessment methodologies, and models for a wide range of
       management applications.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	.—                    Proceedings

•      Evaluate the existing and potential nutrient overenrichment endpoints, assessment
       methodologies, and models in terms of the state-of-the-science supporting their
       applications, date input requirements, and relative ease of transferabUity/application to
       various types of waterbodies and geographically diverse areas.

•      Evaluate and begin to prioritize specific user needs for nutrient overemichment
       endpoints, assessment methodologies, models to address nutrient problems in various
       waterbody types and in geographically diverse areas.

•      Examine ways to apply nutrient assessment tools across various waterbody types,
       geographical areas, and ecoregions.

Recognizing the long history EPA and its partners have had in addressing nutrient
overemichment impacts on aquatic ecosystems, we view this workshop and the subsequent
development of an Agency strategy as a turning point in our commitment to support
development of the tools necessary to set clear, quantifiable endpoints for addressing nutrient
overenrichment problems.  Without definable endpoints - whether they are comprehensive
narrative descriptions, site- or regional-specific numerical criteria, or correlative relationships
defining water quality objectives - and the supporting assessment tools applicable at the
watershed and individual waterbody level, it is difficult to design and implement effective
management actions that are tailored to stem the increasing nutrient overenrichment of the
nation's surface waters.

Through development and implementation of a national strategy,  it is our hope that we can
better support the development, validation, and implementation of the tools State and local
natural resource managers require to address nutrient overenrichment problems in surface
waters.
Robert H. Waylafid m                          Tudor Davies
Director                                       Director
Office of Wetlands, Oceans and Watersheds       Office of Science and Technology

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	— Proceedings

                                 Executive Summary

 The National Nutrient Assessment Workshop was held with the purpose of asking for expert
 recommendations on the components of a national strategy addressing nutrient overenrichment
 issues.  There were  approximately fifty participants in attendance, representing a diversity of
 organizations and geographic regions (a list of the participants is attached at the end of these
 proceedings).

 The participants met over the course of two and a half days to discuss pertinent
 eutrophication issues and potential nutrient assessment and management tools.  Each expert
 participated in one of four groups that were organized by  waterbody (i.e., Estuaries and
 Coastal Waters; Lakes and Reservoirs; Rivers and Streams; and Wetlands) and these groups
 discussed their specific waterbodies during breakout sessions held on the first two days of the
 workshop. Breakout groups reconvened at several points  during the workshop to report to the
 plenary session on the results of their discussions.

 Many tools and measurement endpoints were deemed useful by each of the waterbody
 breakout groups. Some waterbodies were better understood than others in this regard.  For
 example, measurement parameters for lakes are well known and the interactions between
 these parameters and resulting eutrophication are generally understood. Because of this, the
 lakes and reservoirs  breakout group, which was dealing with a well-developed historical
 database, was able to rate the various measurement parameters in terms of their usefulness; in
 some cases the group was able  to assign quantitative thresholds for each parameter. For
 wetlands, on the other hand, the breakout group  was limited by a very small historical
 database and therefore was restricted to identifying potential measurement parameters and
 assigning qualitative judgements to each of the parameters. The wetlands group was also
 handicapped by  the high variability encountered  in wetland types.

 Some of the general recommendations arising from the workshop were:

 •  A set of national standards is not a realistic goal and it  would be more  appropriate to set
   nutrient standards on an ecoregional or watershed basis.

 •  Organizations, states, and societies should be involved in further discussions of nutrient
   assessment and implementation issues, as well as development of the national nutrient
   overenrichment assessment strategy.

«  Cultural eutrophication should be recognized as a public health threat.  The two examples
   that  were mentioned were 1) nutrient overenrichment can stimulate harmful and toxic algal
   species that directly affect the safety  of seafood products and 2) drinking water treated
   from eutrophic lakes and reservoirs can be contaminated with harmful  byproducts of the
   disinfection process (e.g., trihalomethanes).

 •  Land use should  be included as a separate early warning indicator.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop			Proceedings

•  EPA should provide simple, user-friendly, desktop-based software models, where available,
   to state and local governments to aid them in waferbody decision making.

•  While  many models can be recommended for specific waterbody types and sites (e.g.,
   lakes), more research is needed on investigating models for rivers and streams (especially
   periphyton dominated systems), estuaries, and wetlands.

«  The use of "reference sites" to develop baseline data for comparisons to potentially
   impacted areas is recommended, especially for  wetlands where information is scarce.

Some of the waterbody specific conclusions/recommendations arising from the workshop
were:

Lakes and Reservoirs

Conclusions/Recommendations

•  National nutrient criteria must be narrative based and quantitatively implemented on a
   local/regional basis.  This is because public opinion of (and in fact) good water quality
   varies by geographic region.

•  There is a need to develop standardized protocols for several  of the monitoring techniques
   currently used in the field (e.g., total phosphorus, total chlorophyll concentration, Secchi
   depth).  These and other secondary indicators should be described in a technical guidance
   manual for use by all states.

*  Land use change around lakes and reservoirs is one of the most telling early warning
   indicators of water quality trends. It was  said, "A lake is a product of its watershed."

•  Develop desk-top software for States to use for lakes and reservoirs individually to  help
   assess the data they gather.

«  Use professional societies such as the North American Lake Management Society,  as  well
   as EPA Regional meetings with the States and Tribes, to promote nutrient criteria and
   management for lakes and reservoirs

Endpoints

•  Total phosphorus, total nitrogen, total chlorophyll, Secchi depth and dissolved oxygen are
   good endpoints to consider as  indicators of trophic status of lakes and reservoirs.

•  If we use chlorophyll as a parameter,  total chlorophyll is arguably the best  way to measure
   (as opposed to chlorophyll a or b).

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	•	—	—	 Proceedings

•  Secchi disk is a good, simple tool to use on lakes and reservoirs, recognizing that its use is
   limited where water visibility is blocked by suspended inorganic sediment or the water has
   obscuring color such as is naturally found in bog lakes.

»  The best  indicators are (in chronological order of response):

              Early warning indicators:     Land use changes
              Sensitive in-lake indicators:   Total phosphorus, total  chlorphyll, Secchi depth,
                                          total nitrogen
              Lake status indicators:        Total organic carbon, dissolved oxygen, total
                                          suspended solids, turbidity, biological (fish, algae,
                                          zooplankton, macrophytes)

Modeling

*  Simple and effective "desktop" models currently exist at the State level that  incorporate the
   following parameters: dissolved oxygen,  total phosphorus, Secchi depth, total chlorophyll,
   and total  nitrogen.

*  A trend promoted by some modelers is to use carbon as a replacement parameter for
   chlorophyll.

Information Needs/Next steps

«  We need to better define the relationship between management policies and  loading.

•  We need to better understand the relationship between nutrient loading and the macrophyte
   response.

•  We need additional simple, accurate desktop models that distinguish between lakes  and
   reservoirs, as well as geographic and temperate differences.

•  We need a better understanding of the effect that suspended solids have on nutrient release.

Rivers and Streams

Conclusions/Recommendations

•  National  nutrient criteria, whether numeric or narrative, must  be  ecoregion specific,
   because of natural variabilities across waterbody types.

•  National  guidance should encourage States to adopt a nutrient control strategy, which
   includes the following minimum set of endpoints:  total  nitrogen, total phosphorous, Secchi
   denth  dissolved  nxvpp.n  and soluble reartive nhosnhnrnus
memoes me ronowing minimum set or enapoinis:  rcnai nu
depth, dissolved oxygen, and soluble reactive phosphorous.
                                                                                       in

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                           	Proceedings
   States should include land use as a separate early warning indicator (i.e., if development is
   proposed in a watershed, an environmental impact study should be done to assess the
   potential  impact of such development on the surrounding waterbody).

   Minimizing the turbulence by constructing channels in the waterbody would help in
   reducing  the rapid nutrient movement from one segment of the waterbody  to another.

   Shading the streams or canopy restoration can minimize eutrophication.

   Biological control - Managers should consider introducing biomass eating organisms (e.g.,
   cadis fly  larva (Dicosmoecus gilvipes)), which efficiently remove both periphytic diatoms
   and filamentous algae from rock substrata.
Endpoints

Plankton dominated systems

•  Algal Biomass
•  pH
«  Dissolved Oxygen (DO)
•  Chlorophyll
*  Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index)
•  Total Nitrogen vs. Total Phosphorous

•  Transparency  (Secchi disk)
•  Temperature
•  Total suspended solid, Variable
   suspended solid ratio

Modeling
Periphyton dominated systems

• Algal Biomass
* PH
• Dissolved Oxygen (DO)
• Chlorophyll
• Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index)
• Dissolved inorganic nitrogen (DIN) vs.
   Soluble reactive phosphorous
• Transparency (Black disk)
• Temperature
• Total suspended solid, Variable
   suspended solid ratio
   Desktop models that are easily transferred across waterbodies and use the following
   parameters should be encouraged: total phosphorus, total nitrogen, total chlorophyll,
   dissolved oxygen, temperature and light attenuation instrumentations (i.e., Secchi disk and
   black disk).

   Adding temperature simulation to WASPS is recommended.  WASPS is widely used in
   both water quality assessment and toxic modeling.  The model considers comprehensive
   dissolved oxygen and algal processes, but does not include the carbon  and silica cycles or
   full sediment diagenesis.  In addition, the model's use is limited because it does not
   account for temperature.

   Periphyton should be added as a parameter incorporated within QUAL2E and HSPF.
   QUAL2E and HSPF are one-dimensional models that capture the longitudinal transport
   (steady-state flow) which dominate  in most rivers and streams. QUAL2E and HSPF both
IV

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —	 Proceedings

   consider advection and dispersion. Adding periphyton to these models will allow for
   simulation of periphyton biomass  in the riverine system.

•  Introduce load/response relationship (plankton dominated system) and concentration/
   response (periphyton dominated system), in order to pinpoint with high degree of accuracy
   where loading reduction can be targeted.

•  Other models of note are those used in combination with other techniques in the state of
   Montana to set nutrient loading targets for Clark Fork River.

Information Needs/Next steps

•  Use of community metrics as early warning indicator.

•  EPA should conduct a comprehensive  literature search to determine what work has already
   been done on nutrient-related issues in rivers and streams.

•  Need to synthesize information on the  relative sensitivity of different riverine types to
   nutrient enrichment and use this information to investigate regressional relationships.

•  EPA should publish a national technical guidance document summarizing the Agency's
   position on methodology information in  assessing and controlling nutrients.

•  EPA should set up a nationwide database for storing state of the science information on
   nutrient overenrichment endpoints and modeling techniques to serve as a resource center
   for water quality managers at state and local levels.

•  Involve organizations such as American  Society of  Limnologist and Oceanographers
   (ASLO), American Water Resources Association (AWRA), North American Benthological
   Society (NABS) etc., in the development and implementation of the national nutrient
   strategy.

«  Investigate pH and DO amplitude.

*  Investigate the role of fluvial geomorphology as a factor in controlling algal growth.

«  Field research  should be conducted on Cladophora, and diatom growth requirements.

Estuarine and Coastal Waters

Conclusions and Recommendations

•  Coral Reefs - EPA should support research on the relationship between specific nutrient
   concentrations and algal coverage  and  coral reef die-off.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	 Proceedings

•  Seagrass Dominated Systems - Tools for assessing nutrient enrichment impacts on seagrass
   population exist and have been field tested.  EPA should help in the transfer of these tools
   and insights for assessing nutrient enrichment impacts to waterbody specific seagrass
   habitats in estuarine and  coastal management programs.

*  Plankton Dominated Systems - Quantitative  relationships have been established between
   nutrient loading and chlorophyll a (primary productivity) and nutrient loading and
   dissolved oxygen.  EPA should assist research into the use of Vollenweider type methods
   in developing nutrient response relationships for plankton dominated systems.

*  Nuisance Algal Blooms/Brown Tide Blooms - The relationship  between nutrient loadings
   and nuisance algal blooms (e.g., brown tide) is  not well established outside of laboratory
   settings.  EPA should support  a comprehensive synthesis of correlative/experimental
   evidence for toxic  algal blooms response to nutrient enrichment.

»  Macroalgae Dominated Systems - Only a qualitative relationship exists for  relating nutrient
   loadings to macroalgal cover.  EPA should build on the existing information on the
   relationship between nutrient loading and macroalgal cover.

Information Needs/Next Steps

*  Coral reefs - Need to further study the relationship between nutrient concentrations and
   algal coverage and coral  reef die-off.

»  Seagrass - Need to confirm that tools for assessing nutrient enrichment impacts from
   Chesapeake Bay and Tampa Bay are appropriate for use across  other waterbodies (i.e.,
   identify any  limitations of tools).

»  Plankton  - Need to develop nutrient/response relationships for plankton dominated systems
   using Vollenweider type  relationships (i.e., phosphorus loading to hypolimnetic dissolved
   oxygen concentration regressions)

*  Nuisance algae  - Need to establish the relationship between nutrient loadings and nuisance
   algal blooms such as brown  tide in field settings (i.e., ground truth this research).

•  Macroalgae - Need to compile nutrient  loading  data for: seagrass, macroalgae,  and
   phytoplankton.  In addition, confirm the different community responses and pull out
   thresholds relating to these community shifts.  Also, quantify the macroalgae influence on
   dissolved oxygen, dissolved organic carbon,  and lower trophic levels.
VI

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop 	——-———	———	Proceedings

Wetlands

Conclusions/Recommendations

•  There needs to be an accepted national wetlands classification system similar to the
   hydrogeomorphic classification system developed by the Army Corps of Engineers.

•  A nutrient database including baseline data according to wetlands types/regions needs to be
   developed.

•  Field experimentation should be  conducted to determine nutrient limitation to wetland type
   and to isolate the effects of nutrients from other variables, such as hydrology, climate,  and
   natural variability.

•  Need to integrate parameter data collection with wetland indicators, or possibly other EPA
   wetlands programs.

•  Need to improve upon  molecular biology techniques (e.g., stress proteins in plants).

•  Currently, standards for wetlands are primarily narrative since it has been difficult to apply
   certain numeric criteria to  wetlands (e.g., dissolved oxygen is hard to standardize because
   wetlands can be dry at times),

«  Variability is important to  consider in wetlands, especially in extreme flow and rainfall
   events.

Endpoints

•  A "Secchi disk" for wetlands could be feldspar (silicon dioxide) which shows accumulation
   within a wetland over time.  The rate of accumulation can be related to changes in
   productivity.

•  Most important indicators  (short- and long- term) of nutrient impact are: bioavailable
   nitrogen and phosphorous  in sediments, soils, water, and vegetation; hydrology; and loads.
   However, for most of these parameters there is no baseline data available with which to
   compare collected data.

•  For immediate assessment, recommended endpoints are: bioavailable nitrogen and
   phosphorous in soils and water; plant species composition; plant species richness; plant
   species structure; plant indicator  species (vascular and non-vascular); soil oxygen demand.
                                                                                       vn

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	•——	Proceedings

Modeling

•  Very few models exist for wetlands. There is a model under development for the
   Everglades which considers water budget, flow fields, vegetation and biology. It has a
   spatial scale which is important in assessing wetlands.

«  Other models of note are those done for the Des Plaines wetlands and Odum Creek
   (Florida).  However, these lack spatial scale.

•  Landscape models can  be used but are more coarse in their ability to predict impacts.
   Grids can be very large (1 km by 1  km).

•  Some members felt  that numeric models may not  be useful in predicting changes in
   wetlands.  Rather, more simple (i.e., heuristic) models may be more helpful in
   understanding nutrient-related responses  within wetlands.

Information Needs/Next steps

•  EPA should develop a  nationwide database for natural wetlands similar to that currently
   available for constructed wetlands.   The  database should include a wetland type and
   statistical characteristics that apply  to each wetland type.  A national database could be
   used to compare the  measurement parameters of assessed (impacted) wetlands to an
   established  set of reference conditions.

•  EPA should conduct a  comprehensive literature search to determine  what work has already
   been done on nutrient-related issues in wetlands.

•  Organizations such as the State Association of Wetland Managers, Society of wetland
   scientists, and private organizations  (e.g., Ducks Unlimited) should be  involved in the
   development and implementation of the national nutrient strategy.

«  Need to synthesize information on the relative sensitivity of different wetland types to
   nutrient  enrichment  and use this information to investigate regressional relationships.
Vlll

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	•	—•	— Proceedings

                             Day One Plenary Session
                                      Summary

I.  Welcome and Participant Introduction

The National Nutrient Assessment Workshop opened with Rich Batiuk, U.S. EPA Chesapeake
Bay Program Office, who  welcomed all of the  participants and  thanked them for attending.
Participants then introduced themselves and described their area of expertise as it related to
the workshop objectives.  Rich noted that the workshop had succeeded in convening
representatives from a diversity of organizations, interests, and geographic areas to focus on a
set of issues of regional and national  importance.

Rich then presented a brief synopsis of events  leading up to and the purpose behind the
workshop.  He informed the group that the  workshop grew out  of a recommendation of the
EPA Office of Science and Technology Nutrient Task Force draft report released  December
30, 1994 and stressed that EPA and its partners are attempting to re-engage nutrient
overenrichment issues and to identify and address the relevant technical and implementation
issues. He stressed the  importance of identifying endpoints and selecting assessment tools for
use at the individual waterbody and watershed  scales.  He pointed out that  the workshop
should serve as a unique opportunity  to pool the experience that is available in the scientific
and resource management  communities in helping set the short  and long-term priorities for a
national nutrient overenrichment assessment strategy.

II. Introductory Remarks

Tudor Davies, Director, U.S.  EPA Office of Science and Technology

Tudor Davies emphasized  that eutrophication continues to be a  problem faced by  many States
and municipalities.  He challenged the workshop participants to ask whether or not there are
alternative ways to assess  the nature and extent of nutrient enrichment problems and he
reminded them that their discussions should take into account implementation, as  well as
technical and scientific  issues.  Tudor concluded  his remarks by assuring the participants that
EPA is taking this issue very seriously and will use the results of the workshop as it prepares
its national strategy.

Bob Way land, Director, U.S.  EPA Office of Wetlands,  Oceans,  and Watersheds

Bob Wayland spoke about confronting the nutrient overenrichment issue  from a management
perspective.  He mentioned the growing public awareness of eutrophication problems through
programs such as the  Clean Lakes Program, the Chesapeake Bay Program,  and the National
Estuaries Program.  He stressed that a national nutrient strategy needs to have clear
management objectives and recognize concerns of dischargers, especially nonpoint sources,
about affordability.  Bob  expressed his hope that the workshop could serve to facilitate
technology transfer and communication among parties from all of the different communities
represented.

                                                                                       1

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop ~ —		—	Proceedings

 III. Past, Present, and Future Perspectives on the Assessment and Management of
 Nutrient Overenrichment Needs1

 Robert Thomann, Manhattan College

 Robert Thomann presented his perspective on the historical issues associated with the
 assessment and management of nutrient overenrichment.  He divided the past seventy years
 into two periods:  the Observational  Descriptive  period that began in the late 1920s and the
 Predictive Management period that began circa 1965.  He characterized the Observational
 Descriptive period as a time when general observations were being made about nutrient
 enrichment issues, but little was understood concerning the cause and effect relationships
 between loadings and eutrophication.

 The Predictive Management period, on the other hand, was characterized as a time when
 researchers attempted to relate the basic science that was available to practical management
 goals.  The period from 1970  to 1980 saw a rapid expansion in the spatial  detail  and number
 of variables included in nutrient models.  This progress slowed somewhat during  the period
 from 1980 to  1990 (characterized as  the "Dry Years") as many persons came to feel that the
 problem of eutrophication had been solved—the  National Eutrophication Program came to an
 end and attention was diverted to chemical contaminants and acid rain. Interest began to
 grow again during the  late 1980s, however, as the public began to realize that nutrient
 overenrichment could have far-reaching effects.  By this time dynamic modeling  had become
 much more advanced, with more variables being included in  each model and key inputs being
 internalized into the model framework. This development was facilitated by the evolution in
computer technology and a reduction in computer costs.

 Bob concluded his remarks by outlining the requirements of a successful nutrient  management
program.  He pointed out  the need for a credible framework to support quantitative decision
 making that takes into  account what  level of improvement to expect, a time frame for this
 improvement,  and a cost/benefit analysis, if possible.  He also stressed that this framework
should incorporate the  perspectives of nutrient dischargers, the  scientific community, and the
general public.

Mimi Dannel,  U.S. EPA Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds

Mimi Dannel explained where EPA Headquarters and its regional offices are today in terms
of addressing the eutrophication issue.  EPA is aware that there is a  need for management of
excessive nutrient loadings, especially as  evidenced by national and State findings
summarized in Clean Water Act section 305(b) reports (National Water Quality Inventory)
and section 303(d) lists (identifying water quality limited waters).  EPA currently encourages
consideration of nutrient enrichment  issues in State's implementing watershed protection
approaches, community-based  environmental protection approaches, and in  potential
        Summaries of the overheads used during these presentations are attached at the end of the proceedings.

-------
National Nutrient Asxessntent Workshop	———	Proceedings

opportunities for pollutant trading.  Mimi told the participants that she hoped they develop a
list of endpoints and assessment methodologies for each of the waterbodies, as well as a core
set of models to be used for "routine" application across the different waterbody categories.
She indicated that the focus should be on models that already exist and how they could be
enhanced and simplified.  She also indicated that participants need to critically look at the
number of  input parameters and how they are measured.  Finally, she explained that there is a
need  to be  able to demonstrate the costs of model application versus the cost of controls to
avoid focusing on the tool more than the resource.

Steve Heiskary, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency

Steve Heiskary presented workshop participants with the nutrient control approach currently
used  in Minnesota as an example of how a state could address nutrient issues  on a regional
basis.  He explained that most of the lakes in Minnesota are located in  four main ecoregions
and that  phosphorus criteria have been established in each ecoregion based on user
expectations  and regional variations  in attainable lake trophic status. This approach has been
aided by the  selection of "reference" (minimally impacted) lakes within each ecoregion that
were  chosen  based on expert recommendations and input from citizen  monitoring groups.
Steve also explained how Minnesota implemented the lake user survey  approach (developed
in Vermont)  to gauge the public's expectations of lake quality for each of the  different
ecoregions.

Steve mentioned that several other states have been doing progressive  work in this area (e.g.,
Vermont with the user surveys, Oregon with a nuisance phytoplankton approach, and North
Carolina with a  nutrient sensitive approach).  He ended his presentation by explaining that
Minnesota uses its criteria to prioritize and target nutrient reduction projects, to develop water
quality management plans, to serve as an educational tool, and to guide enforcement
decisions.

IV.  Purpose and Goals of the Workshop

After the introductory presentations, Rich Batiuk presented the workshop participants with the
purpose and  goals of the workshop and issued specific challenges to each of the breakout
groups.  Emphasis was placed on coming up with a  practical strategy that encompasses local
nutrient overenrichment assessment and implementation issues. The participants then
separated into their assigned groups  for the day one  breakout sessions.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	Proceedings


                       Breakout Group Discussion Questions

Lakes, and Reservoirs

Nutrient Enrichment Assessment Endpoints
•  What are the currently available, ready to use, and most promising nutrient enrichment
   endpoints for application to lakes, impoundments, and ponds?
«  Are there any early warning indicators of onset of nutrient enrichment conditions?
«  How readily applicable are these endpoints at the  regional, state, and local watershed and
   waterbody assessment scales?  What are their advantages/disadvantages?  Can they be
   applied to a wide range  of waterbodies or are they geographically limited in their
   application?
*  What is the balance that should be achieved between endpoints  with a loading/response
   condition focus vs. endpoints with  more of a user perception-based focus?  Are they
   mutually exclusive or can they be married together in some form?
*  Are there different sets of endpoints that apply only to large lakes vs. impoundments vs.
   small lakes  and ponds?  What are they?
*  What gaps exist in this current array of endpoints that are necessary for regional/state/local
   watershed/waterbody-based assessment of nutrient enrichment status and, ultimately,
   management?  What is the relative priority that should be given to the
   development/calibration/validation of new endpoints?
*  Are some of the endpoints (or the science behind  them) applicable to other non-
   lake/impoundment/pond waterbodies?

Dissolved Oxygen
*  Are the existing EPA freshwater criteria sufficiently protective enough and/or
   comprehensive enough for full application to the  entire range of lake, reservoir, and pond
   ecosystems?

Light Penetration/Nutrient  Criteria
•  Does the current state of the science support derivation of light  attention criteria for lakes,
   impoundments, and ponds? What about nutrient, suspended solids, and chlorophyll a water
   quality  criteria?
•  Should EPA be actively promoting regional-based development  and adoption of such
   criteria for the protection of lake and reservoir habitats?

Models
•  What are the most appropriate models that should be highlighted within the national
   strategy? What  are their relative advantages and disadvantages  in terms of direct
   application, data calibration requirements, and amount of training/expertise necessary to
   allow effective use by regional, state,  and local management agencies?
•  How well do the identified models perform in relation to the preliminary list of endpoints
   that are concurrently being discussed at the workshop?

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop		—	— Proceedings

•  Is there a good match between the available endpoints and the available load-response
   models?
•  Which models and assessment tools are most likely to be used by local water quality
   managers in support of reaching the identified endpoints for each waterbody type?
•  How can existing models be enhanced or what types of new models need to be developed
   to improve modelling capability  and broaden use of models in assessment of nutrient
   enrichment?
•  Are the existing "state of the science" lake  and reservoir models currently being  developed
   for and applied in large lakes and reservoirs at a point whereby simplified versions of the
   models can be extracted and used by smaller,  less wealthy  lake restoration and protection
   programs with the same basic management oriented results? If not, what steps need to be
   taken to get to that point?
•  What about the same questions directed towards  watershed models that feed inputs into
   lake/reservoir water quality models?

Issue Paper
•  Are there obvious gaps in the  lakes and reservoirs issue paper's coverage of the  major
   literature that should be filled  prior to publication as an EPA report and in the peer
   reviewed literature?
*  Are there obvious gaps in the  modeling issue paper's coverage of the major literature
   addressing  lakes and reservoirs that should  be  filled prior to publication as an EPA report
   and in the peer reviewed literature?

Rivers and Streams

Nutrient Enrichment Assessment Endpoints
•  What are the currently available, ready to use, and most promising nutrient enrichment
   endpoints for application to rivers and streams?
•  Are there any early  warning indicators of onset of nutrient enrichment conditions?
•  How readily applicable are these endpoints  at the regional,  state, and local watershed and
   waterbody assessment scales?  What are their advantages/disadvantages?  Can they be
   applied to a wide range  of waterbodies or are they geographically limited in their
   application?
*  Are there different set of endpoints that apply  only to large rivers vs. small streams? fast
   flowing vs. slow flowing rivers?
*  What gaps  exist in this current array of endpoints that are  necessary for regional/state/local
   watershed/waterbody based assessment of nutrient enrichment status and, ultimately,
   management?  What is the  relative priority  that should be given to the
   development/calibration/validation  of new endpoints?
•  Are some of the endpoints (or the science behind them) applicable to other non-riverine
   waterbodies?

-------
National Nutrient Axxexxment Workshop 	-—	Proceedings

Dissolved Oxygen
•  Are the existing EPA freshwater criteria sufficiently protective enough and/or
   comprehensive enough for full application to  the entire range of river and stream
   ecosystems?

Light Penetration/Nutrient Criteria
•  Does the current state of the science support derivation of light attention  criteria for rivers
   and stream? What about nutrient, suspended solids, and chlorophyll a water quality
   criteria?  Are these  really appropriate for these riverine systems (with the possible
   exception of slow flowing rivers and streams  with longer retention times)?
«  Should EPA be actively promoting regional-based development and adoption of such
   criteria?

Models
«  What are the  most appropriate models that should be highlighted within the national
   strategy? What are their relative advantages and  disadvantages in terms of direct
   application, data calibration requirements, and amount of training/expertise necessary to
   allow effective use by regional, state, and local  management agencies?
•  How well do  the identified models perform in relation to the preliminary list of endpoints
   that are concurrently being discussed at the workshop?
•  Which models and assessment tools are most likely to be used by local water quality
   managers in support of reaching the identified endpoints for each  waterbody type?
»  How can existing models be enhanced or what types of new models need to be developed
   to improve  modelling capability and broaden  use  of models in assessment of nutrient
   enrichment?
*  Are the existing "state of the science" models currently being developed for and applied in
   rivers and streams at a point whereby simplified versions of the models can be  extracted
   and used by smaller, less wealthy river/stream restoration and protection  programs with the
   same basic  management oriented results?  If not,  what  steps need to be taken to get to that
   point?

Issue Paper
*  Are there obvious gaps in the rivers and streams issue paper's coverage of the major
   literature that should be filled prior to publication as  an EPA report and in the peer
   reviewed literature?
•  Are there obvious gaps in the modeling issue paper's coverage of the major literature
   addressing rivers and streams that should be filled prior to publication as an EPA report
   and in the peer reviewed literature?

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop ——	——•	•—•	——;—•	••	Proceedings

Wetlands

Nutrient Enrichment Assessment Endpoints
•  Are there any available endpoints useful for assessing the relative impact of nutrient
   enrichment on wetland ecosystems?
*  Are there any early warning indicators for nutrient  enrichment conditions within wetlands?

Models
•  Are there any models available for simulating/assessing the relative impact of nutrient
   enrichment on wetland ecosystems?
•  What are the most appropriate wetlands models that should be highlighted  within the
   national strategy?  What are their relative advantages and disadvantages  in terms of direct
   application, data calibration requirements, and amount of training/expertise necessary to
   allow effective use by regional, state, and local management agencies?
•  How well do the identified models perform in relation to the preliminary list of endpoints
   that are concurrently being discussed at the  workshop?
*  Which models and assessment tools are most likely to be used by local water quality
   managers in support of reaching the identified endpoints for each waterbody type?
•  How can existing models be enhanced or what types  of new models need to be developed
   to improve  modeling capability and broaden use of models  in assessment of nutrient
   enrichment?

Issue Paper
•  Are there obvious gaps in the wetlands issue paper's  coverage of the major literature that
   should be filled prior to publication as an EPA report and in the peer reviewed literature?
*  Are there obvious gaps in the modeling issue paper's coverage of the major literature
   addressing wetlands that should be filled prior to publication as an EPA  report and in the
   peer reviewed literature?

Estuaries and Coastal Waters

Nutrient Enrichment Assessment Endpoints
•  What are the currently available,  ready to use, and  most promising nutrient enrichment
   endpoints for application  to estuarine and coastal waterbodies?
•  Are there any early warning indicators of onset of  nutrient enrichment conditions?
•  How readily applicable are these endpoints  at the regional, state,  and local watershed and
   waterbody assessment scales? What are their advantages/disadvantages? Can they be
   applied to a wide range of waterbodies or are they  geographically limited in their
   application?
•  What gaps  exist in this current array of endpoints that are necessary for  regional/state/local
   watershed/waterbody based assessment of nutrient enrichment status and, ultimately,
   management?  What is the relative priority  that should be given to the
   development/calibration/validation of new endpoints?
*  Are some of the endpoints (or the science behind them)  applicable to other non-
   estuarine/coastal waterbodies?

                                                                                       7

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	———	———	 Proceedings

Dissolved Oxygen
•  Building on the estuarine/marine dissolved oxygen criteria document under preparation for
   northeast (Cape Cod to  Cape Hatteras) coast, should EPA support development of the low
   dissolved oxygen effects databases necessary to publish estuarine/marine dissolved oxygen
   criteria for the southeast Atlantic (Cape Fear to Key West),  Gulf, and Pacific coasts?
•  What about development of the data sets necessary to extend the northeast criteria along
   the coastline north of Cape Cod up into the Gulf of Maine?

Light Penetration/Nutrient Criteria
•  Does  the current state of the science support derivation of light attention criteria for
   protection of submerged aquatic vegetation (seagrasses) along the U.S. coastlines? What
   about nutrient, suspended solids, and chlorophyll a water quality criteria based on
   protecting submerged aquatic vegetation?
•  Should EPA be actively promoting regional-based development and adoption of such
   criteria for the protection of shallow water habitats?

Models
•  What are the most critical nutrient enrichment related issues that the existing models have
   yet to be designed, calibrated,  and/or applied to address?
•  What  are the most appropriate models that should be highlighted within the  national
   strategy? What are their relative advantages and disadvantages in terms of direct
   application, data calibration requirements,  and amount of training/expertise necessary to
   allow  effective use by regional, state, and  local management agencies?
*  How well do the identified models perform in relation to the preliminary list of endpoints
   that are concurrently being discussed at the workshop?
•  Are the existing "state of the science" estuarine/coastal models currently being developed
   for and applied in Chesapeake Bay, Long  Island  Sound and  other larger estuaries  at a point
   whereby simplified versions of the models can be extracted and used by smaller, less
   wealthy estuarine and coastal protection programs with the same basic management
   oriented results?
•  If not, what steps need to be taken to get to that  point?
•  Which models and assessment tools are most likely to be used by local water quality
   managers in support of reaching the identified endpoints for each waterbody type?
•  How can existing models be enhanced or what types of new models need  to be developed
   to improve modelling capability and broaden use of models  in assessment of nutrient
   enrichment?
•  What  about the same questions directed towards  watershed models that feed inputs into
   estuarine/coastal water quality  models?

Issue  Paper
*  Are there obvious gaps in the estuarine/coastal issue paper's coverage of the major
   literature that should be  filled prior to publication as an EPA report and in the peer
   reviewed literature?

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	———	— Proceedings

•  Are there obvious gaps in the modeling issue paper's coverage of the major literature
   which address estuarine and coastal systems that should be filled prior to publication as an
   EPA report and in the peer reviewed literature?

Watersheds

Nutrient Enrichment Assessment Endpoints
•  What is/what should be the relationship between nutrient enrichment endpoints for
   watersheds themselves  vs. endpoints addressing watersheds as contributors to downstream
   waterbodies?   Is there an inherent conflict here?

Models
•  What are the  most appropriate watershed models that should be highlighted within the
   national strategy?  What are their relative advantages and disadvantages  in terms of direct
   application, data calibration requirements, and amount of training/expertise necessary to
   allow effective use by regional, state, and local  management agencies?
•  How well  do  the identified models perform in relation to the preliminary list of endpoints
   that are concurrently being discussed at the workshop?
•  Which models and assessment tools are most likely to be used by local water quality
   managers in support of reaching the identified endpoints for each waterbody type?
•  How can existing models be enhanced  or what types of new models need to be developed
   to improve modelling capability and broaden use of models in  assessment of nutrient
   enrichment?

Issue Papers
•  Are there obvious gaps in the four issue papers* coverage of the major literature addressing
   watershed  models that should be filled  prior to publication as an EPA report and in the
   peer reviewed literature?

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	 Proceedings


                              Day Two Plenary Session
          Summary of Reports from Breakout Groups and Discussion

Workshop participants reconvened on the morning of the second day to report on the results
of their breakout group discussions.  The following is a summary of what each of the
facilitators had to say concerning their respective day one breakout group sessions,

I. Lakes and  Reservoirs Summary

The  breakout group began its discussion  by outlining  what it hoped to accomplish during the
course of the workshop. It was agreed that the group would be making recommendations to
EPA on the utility of using various parameters to assess waterbody status and to use as early
warning indicators2 of lake and reservoir nutrient overenrichment. The breakout group also
agreed that they would be providing general recommendations on issues that would need to
be addressed in a national nutrient assessment strategy, including the capabilities and
limitations of existing  modeling tools for lakes and reservoirs.

To organize the discussion, the group divided an initial list of parameters into three
categories. The group realized that these categories could be differentiated in a number of
ways (e.g., proactive parameters vs. reactive parameters; thermodynamic parameters vs.
species  succession/community structure parameters; parameters that are well understood vs.
less well-understood parameters.)   Eventually the group decided to separate the parameters
into the following subsets:

Chemical/Biomass Parameters
•  Land Use/Loading               • Nitrogen Concentration    * Secchi Depth
•  Phosphorus Concentration        • Chlorophyll              • Dissolved Oxygen

Community Structure Parameters
•  Algal Community               • Macrophytes             • Zooplankton
•  Macroinvertebrate Structure      • Fish

Secondary Parameters
*  Total Suspended Solids          « Total Organic Carbon

The group began to evaluate each of these parameters based on the following evaluation
criteria:

How Measured         What quantitative units are used to measure the parameter?
        An early warning indicator was defined as "a change from a baseline condition within a region and
classification of the water resource and watershed which is sufficiently rapid to initiate increased monitoring or
management before degradation (unacceptable change) takes place."
10

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                                                          Proceedings
Value
Scientific Validity
Practicality
Cost
What advantages does using the parameter provide to the resource
manager relative to using other parameters?

Are there well-accepted (i.e., within the scientific community),
reproducible measurement techniques available for measuring the
parameter?

Is this a parameter that the states can realistically use given time,
personnel, and resource constraints?

What is the cost of collecting and using this parameter?
Public Understanding   Is this a parameter that the public understands and will support?

Modeling Capability/   Is the relationship between loading and subsequent response well-
Load-Response         understood? Can the  parameter be modeled given existing tools  or
                         easy-to-develop tools?

In general, the group was able to reach consensus on a rating3 for each of the evaluation
criteria for each of the parameters. The results of their discussion are summarized in the
tables below. Blank spaces in the "Rating" column indicate  that either no consensus was
reached or no formal designation was specified.
Land Use/Loadings
How Measured
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
High
Variable
High
Medium
to High
High
Notes
Loadings are measured based on the existing understanding
between certain types of land use and related loadings.
Aggregated loadings allow you to get to one number for all of
the sources within a watershed

Some states have adequate land use data while others are still in
the process of gathering it.

Public does not intuitively understand the relevance of loading,
but is capable of learning (as evidenced by 40% reduced
loading target for Chesapeake Bay).

    'A high rating typically meant that the group felt the parameter performed well in terms of the evaluation
criteria (e.g., a high rating for Scientific Validity means the parameter is well-accepted within the scientific
community whereas a low rating means that it is not).  The one exception was the cost criteria, in which case a
low rating is preferable to a high rating.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —-
Proceedings
Phosphorus
Units of Measurement
(Total P)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
Medium
to High
Low
High
Medium
to High

Notes
Total phosphorus should be used because it is a more
comprehensive measurement.
Phosphorus is the start of all productivity. Total phosphorus
also has the potential for being a "one shot" measurement
because other variables can usually be related to it.
Scientific validity is high for lakes (especially for certain tvpes
of lakes); not as well established for reservoirs.
Already measured as a component of most monitoring
programs. Springtime phosphorus can be especially cheap
because it only needs to be collected once.

The meaning behind phosphorus concentrations has to be
translated for the public, but interested citizens are aware of
their significance.
Modeling capability is especially good for temperate and glacial
lakes.
Nitrogen
Units of Measurement
(Total N)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

Medium

Low
Medium
Low

Notes

Nitrogen used to get N:P ratio; some systems are nitrogen
limited.
Nitrogen interactions have not been as extensively studied as
phosphorus because there is less motivation to do so for lakes
and reservoirs.
Cost of sampling is similar to that for phosphorus.
Not as practical as phosphorus because fewer lakes and
reservoirs are nitrogen limited. EPA needs to promote a
standard methodology for sampling.
Public is less aware of significance of nitrogen (as compared to
phosphorus); they tend to be lumped together as "nutrients".
More sophisticated models for predicting impact of nitrogen
concentrations need to be developed; load-response relationship
not worked out as well as for phosphorus because of the
number of variables in the nitrogen cycle (e.g., nitrogen
fixation).
12

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—
Proceedings
Chlorophyll
Units of measurement
(mg/l)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
High
Low
Medium
Medium
Variable
Notes
The group differed on the utility of using total chlorophyll vs.
chlorophyll a. One problem with chlorophyll a is that
measurements taken prior to 1982 can't be compared to later
values because the measurement method has changed. The
group suggested that EPA make a definitive statement on a
standardized methodology.
Chlorophyll is the best biomass surrogate and is the first
biomass response to phosphorus. Chlorophyll is also the most
interpretable parameter, but has high temporal and spatial
variability.
Chlorophyll is less predictable than phosphorus and is not as
good for trend detection because of its high variability.
Sampling cost similar to phosphorus, although collection costs
are higher.
Samples need to be taken many times per year and over the
course of several years to detect trends. The group
recommended the sampling regime spreadsheet distributed by
the North American Lake Management Society as guidance.
Measurement may be linked to subjective measures of user
perceptions.
Chlorophyll concentrations can be modeled, but need to have
phosphorus concentrations to do so.
Secchi Depth
Units of Measurement
(depth)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
Variable
Low
High
High

Notes
Seems like a simple process, but the group recommended that
EPA establish a consistent methods and material protocol.
Secchi depth measurements have low temporal variance
(especially compared to chlorophyll), but high silt content can
distort the use of the readings for nutrient impact (i.e., may be
a non-nutrient enrichment related problem).
Depends upon what it is used for — low validity if used for
chlorophyll surrogate, but high if used to estimate
transparency and total phosphorus.


Measurement may be linked to subjective measures of user
perceptions.
Not a straight line relationship because it is difficult to
distinguish Secchi depth changes once in the low visibility
range. There is also a problem with natural variability when
trying to detect trends: only a few models break transparency
down into total suspended solids, color, etc.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
Dissolved Oxygen*
Units of Measurement
(mg/I)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

Variable

Low
High
High
High
Notes
Measurement generally accepted as end of summer dissolved
oxygen in hypolimnion; could also be areal hypolimnetic
oxygen depletion (AHOD) or oxygen depletion rate or days of
anoxia or when the lake went anoxic.
Four problems: 1) there is considerable spatial and temporal
variability associated with dissolved oxygen readings; 2)
southeastern reservoirs display rapid changes between anoxia
and oxia during withdrawal cycles; 3) some investigators now
want to measure CO2 accumulation rate as a negative oxygen
value (i.e., a reducing environment); 4) affected by non-
nutrient-related factors such as temperature and morphology.
Has cross lake validity and provides information on aquatic life
use support.
Fairly cheap once equipment is available; have to measure at
least four times per year.

There is a high degree of public understanding because low
dissolved oxygen levels are related to fish kills.
Can be modeled at least as well as the other parameters.
*Discussion restricted to lakes that stratify.

After discussing the chemical/biomass parameters, the group talked about whether or not total
suspended solids or total organic carbon should be included as potential nutrient assessment
endpoints.  They eventually agreed that both parameters provide additional information
beyond that provided by the previously mentioned parameters and decided to add them as
"secondary parameters". The point was made that carbon might prove helpful because it is
related to a host of other waterbody problems that affect and are affected by eutrophication.

It was also during this discussion that the importance of emphasizing eutrophication as a
public health concern first arose. In particular,  the participants  noted the hazards associated
with consuming drinking  water containing potentially carcinogenic disinfection by-products,
such as trihalomethanes.  (Trihalornethanes can  be produced as  a by-product of the
disinfection process used  in plants that take their water from eutrophic lakes or reservoirs.)
The group agreed that this public health issue needs to be emphasized by EPA and others to
gain public support for a national nutrient strategy.

Several questions were posed to  the lakes breakout group by members of the plenary session.
These included whether or not the group had addressed the cross-cutting issue of assessing
and managing large lakes vs.  small lakes and whether or not the group had evaluated how
well the different species  of phosphorus would  serve as endpoints (as  opposed to total
phosphorus). The lakes group stated that these  were two issues they intended to address in
the next breakout session.
14

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	—	 Proceedings

II.  Rivers and Streams Summary

Introductions/Agenda

The rivers and streams breakout group began with participant introductions and a discussion
of the agenda. The participants briefly discussed the morning  plenary session and agreed that
a reiteration of the breakout group's goals and objectives would not be necessary. Some of
the participants suggested using the issue paper as a springboard for the discussion.  While
this suggestion was not adopted, participants agreed that during the course of the workgroup
session attention should be given to identifying and filling in the information gaps in the issue
paper.

The main issue addressed in the discussion of the agenda was  whether or not the group
should pursue a process versus an endpoint specific approach to addressing the problem  of
nutrient loading.  Participants emphasized the importance of recognizing local and regional
differences among rivers and streams.  There was an acknowledgement that it would be  very
difficult to develop specific endpoints that could be applied to all river and stream systems.
As a result, the group agreed to focus on developing a better understanding of the nutrient
loading process in an effort to provide recommendations on  appropriate indicators.

Moving from their agreement to emphasize process, the group began to discuss some of the
basic biological factors associated with the nutrient loading.  There was a consensus that
understanding nutrient  loading impacts on streams and rivers was different from
understanding nutrient  loading impacts on lakes.  The relationship between algae growth and
nutrient loading is relatively linear in  lakes while in streams the relationship is  more complex.
In a more dynamic stream or river ecosystem, low levels of soluble  nutrients can produce
both small  and large volumes of biomass.

Factors Contributing  To Nutrient Growth

Participants agreed that given this complexity, more information  was needed to improve our
understanding of the various relationships and factors associated with algae growth in streams
and rivers.  As a result, the group felt it would  be an  important first step to list some of the
known factors other than nutrient loading that contribute to algae growth.  Some of the
factors mentioned by the participants included:

• Extended low flow periods
• Grazers, fish
• Stream morphology
• Scouring flow threshold  - "tumbling rocks" disrupts colonization (in periphyton dominated
  systems).

Emerging from this discussion was an awareness that nutrients may  not always be the main
contributor to algal growth. In fact, one participant noted that this might indicate a  mis-
                                                                                      15

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	•	 Proceedings

focusing of traditional management efforts by primarily  regulating nutrient loading and not
adequately addressing the other contributing factors.

As a result of this discussion, participants reconfirmed their commitment to a process oriented
approach.  The group agreed that it would be useful to categorize the different types of
streams and rivers.  Participants felt that this would facilitate the identification of some basic
endpoints as well as a better understanding  of the nutrient loading process.

River and Stream Categorization and Endpoint Identification

To effectively categorize rivers and streams and identify endpoints, the group began by listing
some of the major factors that should be considered in a stream/river categorization.
Participants identified the following factors:

•  Regime/climate                         •  Stream order/drainage area
*  Substratum (eroding vs.  deposition       •  Regulated vs. unregulated
•  Land use                               •  Local geology
•  Canopy cover/riparian vegetation         •  Flow
•  Volume  of wetted channel/bankfill       •  Morphology

From this brief discussion of factors, the group initially reached the conclusion that a basic
way to categorize the different types of streams and rivers was to distinguish between low
gradient and high gradient streams.  The participants, however, soon discarded this distinction
and agreed that a more appropriate characterization would be between plankton dominated
and periphyton dominated streams.

Following the basic categorization, the group was then able to move on to identifying
endpoints.  Essentially, for both plankton dominated and periphyton dominated streams the
participants identified factors that they felt were meaningful in  terms of managing and
understanding these systems.  Participants did not focus their discussion on specific numbers
or measurements for the endpoints. Table  1 on the following page lists the basic endpoints
that were identified for each system.  Potential endpoints that were specifically not
recommended for both systems included nitrogen:phosphorus ratios and the algal growth test.
16

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                                    Proceedings
Table 1.  Potential Endpoints for Plankton and  Periphyton Dominated Systems.
              Plankton Dominated
           Periphyton Dominated
  Algal biomass
  pH (maximum and diel)
  Dissolved Oxygen (minimum and diel)
  Transparency (Secchi depth)
  Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index,
    community composition)
  Total suspended solids, volatile suspended solids,
   ratios
  Dissolved organic material
  Autotrophic Index (AFDW/CNa)
  Total nitrogen
  Total phosphorus
  Ratios of summer/winter nutrient concentrations
  Ratios of dissolved/total nutrient concentrations
  Aesthetics (foam, scum)
Algal biomass (mg/m2, percent coverage)
pH (maximum and diel)
Dissolved Oxygen (minimum and diel)
Transparency (Black disk)
Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index,
  community composition)
Total suspended solids, volatile suspended solids,
 ratios
Dissolved organic material
Autotrophic Index (AFDW/cht a)
Total nitrogen, dissolved  inorganic nitrogen
Total phosphorus, soluble reactive
  phosphorus
Ratios of summer/winter  nutrient concentrations
Ratios of dissolved/total nutrient concentrations
Aesthetics (foam, scum)
Process Diagrams

Following the identification of endpoints,  the discussion moved to how the different endpoints
and factors that influence algae growth interrelate and connect.  Group members decided to
construct flow diagrams to facilitate the understanding of the eutrophication process in both
plankton and periphyton dominated systems. The figures on the next page are the process
diagrams that were created by the participants.  Both of the diagrams take a  "nutrient centric"
view  of the process.  The  interrelationships  among the other contributing  factors to algae and
periphyton growth were not discussed in detail.
                                                                                              17

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop 	—

Figure 1. Plankton Dominated Systems.
                                                                 Proceedings
                             Figure 2. Periphyton Dominated Systems.
     AESTHETICS
     TRANSPARENCY
                      FISH
            BIOINTEGRITY
     FACTORS
  flow regime
  channel
   characteristics
  velocity
 j travel time
 i light availability
 j temperature
 I mass transport of
   nutrients
  turbulence
  toxictty
  organic carbon
   inputs
NUTRIENTS
   TN,TP
   AESTHETICS
   TRANSPARENCY
                      FISH
            BIOINTEGRITY
   FACTORS
*flow regime
channel
 characteristics
'velocity,
 turbulence
travel time
*TSS, scouring,
high flow, bed
transport
•grazing
light availability
temperature
mass transport of
 nutrients
toxicity, other
 growth limiters
fine sediment
organic carbon
                                 inputs
NUTRIENTS
  DN,SRP
   TN, TP
                                                     * specific factors that set periphyton dominated systems apart
                                                     from plankton dominated svstems
The day's discussion concluded with the group highlighting the key differences between the
plankton  dominated and periphyton dominated systems.  Participants identified four specific
factors that set periphyton dominated systems apart from plankton dominated systems:  the
flow regime, velocity, total suspended  solids/scouring/high flow/bed transport, and grazing.
The group emphasized that these factors all contribute  to the one major characteristic that
distinguishes these  two systems. The major differentiating characteristic  is that nutrients will
saturate the  biomass at a much lower level in the periphyton dominated system than they will
in the  plankton dominated system.

To help illustrate this difference, participants constructed the graphs in Figure 3.  The graphs
show the relationship between nutrient concentrations and biomass saturation in  both plankton
dominated and periphyton systems.  Note that  the graphs only  serve to illustrate a concept.
The graphs are not drawn to scale and they have not been constructed from actual data, but
are based on the combined experience of the discussion group.  The numbers  begin to
approximate the typically observed thresholds  based on limited field studies.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                                     — Proceedings
Figure 3.  Relationships between nutrient concentrations and biomass saturation in both
plankton and periphyton dominated systems.
               "300
              I
      Plankton Dominated Lakes &
Maybe Plankton Dominated Rivers1
                                            -500
                          Total Phosphorus |ug/L)
               1000 h
                                 Periphyton Dominated Rivers1
            s a.
                          10 Soluble Reactive Phosphorus (wg/L)
                          50 Dissolved Inorganic Nitrogen

                    i: Light Travel Time, Grazing
                                                                          19

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —	 Proceedings

III.  Wetlands

To begin the morning session, the wetlands breakout group discussed the definition and use of
the term  'endpoint'.  When a variable is chosen and a threshold determined, that threshold
value or  range can become an endpoint.  Based on current operational definition, a "standard"
only differs from an endpoint in that it has a legal connotation. However, there are different
types of endpoints, such as measurement and assessment endpoints.  Because the terminology
can lend  to confusion, the group agreed to use  the term 'measurement parameters'.  Once the
appropriate list of parameters for measuring change's in  wetlands can be determined, then
assignment of them as endpoints or standards can be later determined.

Currently, the standards for wetlands in the United States are primarily narrative criteria
developed by  states, as  it is has been difficult to apply certain numeric criteria to wetlands.
For example, dissolved  oxygen is hard to  standardize, because a wetland can be dry and have
zero dissolved oxygen.  Enforcement and  setting of permit limits are based on fixed numbers,
but  for wetlands, the limits might be based on concentrations related to flow or even load-
based measures.

The breakout group recognized that literature synthesized and analyzed for the issue paper
tended to vary on the issue of wetland nutrient sensitivity. Variability is important to
consider  in wetlands, especially in flow, rainfall, and extreme events. Examples were sought
where some measurement number has been set for wetlands and used as  a goal for
management efforts. One example from the Everglades was  described where phosphorus was
selected as a focus, but  other factors such as seasonal and natural variability were  also
considered important. Other potential parameters include:
    Nitrogen species concentration
    Phosphorus species concentration
    Nitrogen:phosphorus ratio
    Dissolved oxygen  concentration
Another issue that was raised was whether the initial list of potential parameters included
measures which are important to  wetlands. The group agreed that the national nutrient
assessment strategy should be looking for some  measurement that will indicate whether a
wetland is impacted, on its way to being impacted, or if there is another factor that drives the
system  from the outside.  These measurements may need to be normalized (for example,
changes by  season).  Sediment also needs to be  considered, because nutrients are related to
sediment loading in wetlands. Change of community structure is also measurable and shows
the effect of eutrophication in wetlands.  It is necessary to  understand the natural history of
the system to see if the structure, species composition, etc. are natural or anthropogenic. One
suggestion  was to detect nutrient-related changes in wetlands through the use of reference or
control  sites.
20

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	———	———	 Proceedings

The group agreed to attempt to identify measurement parameters, and emphasized that there is
a need to identify early warning signals, signals that may clue managers and scientists into
what may occur 10 years later.  The following tasks of the breakout group were identified:

1)  Create a list of parameters which measure and improve our understanding of nutrient-
    related impacts to wetlands.
2)  Rank the parameters in importance or organize them for wetlands  in a national strategy,
3)  Decide how to implement assessment.
4)  Create a list of available models, if any, for use in nutrient assessment of wetlands.

The following two approaches were discussed on how to best address these tasks:

    •  Identify parameters first and then discuss application in various wetland types
    •  Identify wetland type first and then discuss what parameters are appropriate for
       specific types.

The workgroup expressed concern that it might not be able to agree on definitions of
wetlands, and therefore, would like to avoid discussing wetland types initially.  Given the
potentially long  list of wetland types, and potentially involved discussion around the type of
wetland classification system to  use,  the group agreed to first examine  a hypothetical wetland
system and make a list of measurement parameters, emphasizing parameters that potentially
apply to as many wetlands as possible.  Thus, discussion centered around processes in
wetlands as a first step followed by discussion of their application to wetlands types.

The group acknowledged other important questions to consider, but also recognized the time
limitations and the need to develop specific  measurement parameters for wetlands.  Some of
the other issues/questions to consider included:

    •  Eutrophication needs to be  defined according to whether it is natural or human-
       induced.
    •  At what point is eutrophication  in a wetlands system considered a "bad" thing?  (For
       example, too many cattails  in the Everglades—what causes these to spread and  is that
       "natural". First we need  to decide what's good and what's bad).
    •  Decisions need to be made on whether the system should be controlled or allowed to
       follow the change (even if it is  human-induced).

Another suggestion was made by the breakout group that here should be an EPA database for
natural wetlands (like that currently available for constructed wetlands). The database  should
include a wetland type and statistics  that apply to each type.  Figure 1  illustrates how a
national database could be used  to compare  the measurement parameters of assessed wetlands
to an established set of reference conditions. Wetland conditions found to  lie outside of  the
normal range would indicate impacted  conditions.
                                                                                      21

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
Figure 4.    Hypothetical example of how a national database of reference wetlands
            could be used in assessment of nutrient impacts.  Dashed lines represent a
            hypothetical confidence interval around a given reference set.  Type A, B, C,
            and D refer to different wetland types.  Driving functions and response
            variables can be single or multiple variables.
Ecosystem response
variableorindex

Community metabolism
Enzyme activity
SoiJ accretion rate
Sediment  oxygen demand
Nutrient retention
Species indices
iliyil









. type A
••
'•V..
*vv\
\>t\
\*\ ' .••''
>'0'''
WAfy
/*jK--i
y
low

0 0
0.«i'0
w
: I .»
/typeB



typeD f-^rf
"^
hig
                                Ecosystem driving functions
                                Areal nutrient load index (average and variable)
                                Area! hydrologic load index (average and variable)
                                Retention time index (average and variable)
                                Altitude
22

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——-—:	Proceedings

The group next discussed the relationship  between wetland processes and wetland indicators
as one potential way to use indicators to assess wetlands.  Parameters measuring wetland
processes can be organized by:

*  water quality
•  soil
*  hydrology
*  biota
*  processes

Important nutrient processes in wetlands were  listed as follows:

Carbon
    •  respiration (microbes)
    •  aerobic (water, litter, soil)
    •  anaerobic (soil)
       - sulfate reduction
       - methanogenesis
    •  plant  uptake

Nitrogen
    •  mineralization
    •  nitrification/denitrification (includes  nitrate reduction)
    •  biological nitrogen fixation
    •  plant  uptake

Phosphorus
    •  mineralization
    *  plant  uptake
    •  soil adsorption

Traditional water quality parameters can also affect or be affected by nutrients and should not
be overlooked (e.g., those parameters typically used for assessment of lakes, rivers, and
streams).  Surface water chemistry (pH, temperature, and cations) should be reviewed as
potential parameters. Another issue discussed  was groundwater chemistry. Both surface and
groundwater quality should.  Groundwater interactions and influence on wetlands depend on
the type of wetland, but where applicable,  groundwater chemistry should be considered.

Additional  Issues

Important issues also discussed during the  course of  parameter identification included the
following:

Which nutrients are limiting in a given wetland?  This  is the critical indicator, and a
function of  other variables, such as wetland type, water source, latitude, seasonality, time of

                                                                                        23

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop -		•—	— Proceedings

sampling and other factors.  Many of the selected parameters may be irrelevant unless
sensitivity of the wetland's response  to nutrient enrichment is known. For example, Spartina
sp. salt marshes may exist at either low or high phosphorous or nitrogen concentrations, and
loading rates may make no difference to salt marsh  response sensitivity.  Some bogs cannot
tolerate certain nitrogen and phosphorus variations.

Signal to noise ratio was  also discussed as an issue of importance for some of the chemical
parameters.  Multiple samples would be required to  understand the variability observed during
sampling within a particular wetland.  For wetland assessment, one suggestion was discussed
to place Feldspar (silicon dioxide)  in a variety of wetlands, marking the area where deposited
(e.g., with a global positioning system), and then monitoring for 5 to 10 years.  This would be
an inexpensive methodology and would show any sediment/organic accretion.

Finally, information gaps identified during the course of the first day's discussion included
stress indicators in plant physiology  and rnicrobial community structure.
24

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	_	_	_	___	_ procee^ni,s

IV.  Estuaries and Coastal Waters

The estuaries and coastal waters  breakout group approached its review of the current status of
nutrient enrichment assessment from three different perspectives:  understanding causal
relationships between nutrient enrichment and estuarine/coastal waters use impairments;
evaluating the quantitative  or qualitative nature of relationships between nutrient loadings and
system responses; and identification of existing nutrient enrichment assessment tools and
necessary next  steps organized by several dominant estuarine/coastal communities. The  group
concluded that  there is a real need to develop additional confidence in a select number of key
empirical (hopefully causal) relationships, but that the goal of quantitative and predictive
relationships for measurement "endpoints"  is simply out of reach for most of the usual list of
indicative measurements.  In response to this, the group chose to identify use impairments
{responses) and then to seek an approach to constructing empirical relationships between these
and probable (generally accepted) causal agents directly or indirectly  linked to nutrient
loadings.

Use Impairments

The first round of breakout group discussion yielded the following listing of nutrient
overenrichment related use impairments for estuarine and coastal waters:

Beaches
   * Toxic and nontoxic algal blooms
   • Aesthetics
   • Sea  Lice (Florida)

Shellfish beds
   * Toxic algal  blooms (both human and shellfish health concerns; habitat concerns)
   • Nontoxic  algal blooms (e.g., brown tides — habitat concerns)

Aquatic habitat
   • Seagrass losses (due to both loss of light penetration to leaf surfaces and direct toxic
     effects from exposure to elevated nitrate in the leaf zone)
   * Organic fouling on settling  surfaces
   • Benthic community impairments (low dissolved oxygen; direct toxic effects through
     exposure  to elevated sediment ammonia, organic carbon concentrations)
   • Fish community impairments (low dissolved oxygen, loss of prey, loss  of habitat,
     increased  disease prevalence)
   • Coral reef dieoffs
   • Presence of nuisance  species (excessive macrophytes; species shifts)
   • Aesthetics (odors, discoloration of the waters)
                                                                                       25

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——;—	Proceedings

Nutrient Loading/System Response Relationships

Breakout group members posed three questions to characterize the relative certainty of how
well we understand the relationships between nutrient loading and responses of
estuarine/coastal systems:

•   What do we know quantitatively with regard to nutrient loading-system response?
•   What do we know qualitatively  with regard to nutrient loading-system response?
•   Where do we think there may be a relationship, but we can't quantify or quality the
    relationship?

Examples of the quantitative relationships included:   nutrient loading/chlorophyll a and
primary production relationships, nutrient loading/dissolved oxygen relationship, and  nutrient
loading/seagrass production relationships. Two examples were given for qualitative
relationships: nutrient loading/fish yields and nutrient loading/macroalgae.

System-based Tools  and Needs

The breakout group next discussed nutrient  assessment issues within  the context of specific
types of coastal systems.  The first round of breakout sessions concluded with a discussion of
coral  reef systems.

Coral reef systems

Tools

•   Regression relationship of the percent algal cover vs. nutrient concentration to provide the
    threshold concentrations at which the coral reefs become degraded (e.g.,  1  um dissolved
    inorganic nitrogen, 0.1  urn soluble reactive phosphorus from research by LaPointe and
    colleagues),

•   Regression relationship of coral  coverage by algae vs. nutrient loadings.

Next  Steps

«   Fund a team of investigators to conduct a critical synthesis of the studies supporting these
    relationships, publish the results, and get scientific/management community buy-in.

«   Support synthesis of existing work and support further studies necessary  to quantify  the
    relationship between coral reef community fish diversity, algal  cover, and nutrient loading.

•   Develop and publish case study  examples to provide for straightforward illustrations of the
    above relationships for the public.
26

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—-—	———	— Proceedings

                             Day Three Plenary Session
          Summary of Reports from Breakout Groups and Discussion

On the  afternoon of the second day, workshop participants addressed cross-cutting issues
within their breakout groups. The focus during these discussions was on how appropriate
tools can be applied to accomplish nutrient management goals, the transferability of various
tools across waterbody types and geographically and ecologically diverse areas, and the
prioritization of  user needs.

Workshop participants then met on the morning of the third day to summarize the results of
their second round of breakout group discussions.  Each breakout group facilitator reported on
the recommendations made by their respective breakout group and answered questions  posed
to the group by  other  members of the  workshop. Important "next steps" and organizations to
involve in the process were also identified during this period.

I. Lakes and Reservoirs

The lakes and reservoirs breakout group began its  second round of discussion by reviewing
several  of the objectives of the workshop.  They agreed that one component of the national
nutrient assessment strategy  should be to provide a guidance document to the states regarding
the importance of controlling nutrient overenrichment.  The guidance document should  also
identify the best available assessment and control tools.  The group also acknowledged  that an
assumption throughout their discussion was that any  type of guidance should be based on a
regional approach due to climatological differences between regions as well as variable user
perceptions between regions.  The ecoregion approach  used by Minnesota was brought  up as
an example of how this could be done. The importance of including land use changes  as
early warning indicators was stressed.

The next step that the group took was  to evaluate the community/ecological structure
parameters.  A general discussion was held concerning the difference between  these types of
parameters and the chemical/biomass parameters.  It  was agreed that  the biological/
community structure indicators cannot be modeled as well as the chemical/biomass
parameters.  This is partially due to the fact that there are numerous factors (other than
nutrients) that can affect them.  The point was also made that biological indicators can  be
measured in a number of ways—tolerance, intolerance, functional groups, health conditions,
diversity (dominance), numbers, threshold effects, and  indicator species. It was also
suggested that although the public may be  most concerned with biological indicators, they are
the most difficult to predict. The issues raised in connection with each of the individual
community/ecological structure parameters are summarized in the tables which follow.
                                                                                     27

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
Algal Community
Units of Measurement
(several ways to measure)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
Promising
High
Variable


Notes
Algal community could be measured as concentration or taxa
composition; need an accepted, cost-effective measurement
technique.
Value would be very high with an appropriate, accepted
parameter; contains information on the state of the system.

Need more rapid assessment techniques.
Usefulness is hindered by lack of adequate state databases
(i.e., need a background to compare to).

Group was shown graph displaying the relationship between
trophic state index and fish abundance (based on study done
by Bruce Wilson, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency).
Combination of Biological
Indicators*
Units of Measurement
(many ways to measure)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
Variable
Medium
to High

High
Low
Notes
Biological indicators can be measured in a number of ways —
tolerance, intolerance, functional groups, health conditions,
diversity (dominance), numbers, threshold effects, and indicator
species.
Highly visible indicators of lake biota; however, do not serve as
early warning indicators and are not phosphorus specific (i.e.,
are influenced by a number of factors besides phosphorus.)
Validity depends upon how indicators are used (i.e., good for
evaluating consequences, not as good for providing information
on trophic state).
Individual samples cost a lot, but need to sample less often and
take fewer samples.
Complements other information; basically addresses whether or
not species is there, its abundance, and the size of organisms.

We do not have accepted predictive capabilities for all of these
types of endpoints; ones that are available should be used with
caution.
* To facilitate the discussion, the group addressed zooplankton, benthos, and fish measurements together.
28

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
Macrophytes
Units ot" Measurement
(many ways to measure)
Value
Scientific Validity
Cost
Practicality
Public Understanding
Modeling Capability/ Load-
Response
Rating

High
High
Variable
High
High
Low
Notes
Biomass of macrophytes can be measured as grams dry
weight/nr or grams phosphorus/gram carbon; extent can be
measured as areal coverage. Issue of light deprivation and
effect on macrophyte growth was raised.




The public can readily understand the significance of dense
weedmats impeding boat traffic and swimming.
Limited by our inability to predict whether a system will be
plankton or macrophyte dominated (depends on depth of lake,
springtime conditions, substrate, etc.).
General Recommendations

 1)  Any  nutrient strategy should be promoted and developed on a regional basis.
       The breakout group agreed that a national nutrient assessment strategy could only be
       done if individual regions—both EPA regions and ecoregions within states—were
       given the flexibility to adopt their own nutrient endpoints (i.e., no single national
       number should be promulgated by EPA). The regional approach is  necessary because
       of the different types of waterbodies that exist across different climates and the fact
       that user perceptions of acceptable water quality also differ.  Minnesota's ecoregion
       approach was referred to as an example.

2)  The benefits of addressing nutrient overenrichment should be recognized as a  public
    health benefit.
       To gain public  support, the impact of nutrient overenrichment on public health needs
       to be stressed.  An important example is  the effect nutrient enrichment can have on
       drinking water  supplies (e.g., trihalomethanes and toxic algal blooms).

Specific  Tools

1)  EPA  should publish a national technical guidance document summarizing the Agency's
    position on (and recommended methods for)  nutrient assessment and control.
       This document  would serve to eliminate the  ad  hoc approach  that currently exists from
       one state to another and would motivate certain states to become more proactive.  The
       publication of such a document would also signal that addressing nutrients is a
       national priority.
                                                                                      29

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop		•—•	________________	Proceedings

2) States should include land use as a separate early warning indicator (e.g., if development
   is proposed in a watershed,  some type of analysis should be done concerning potential
   impacts on the waterbody.)
       The group realized that this was an obvious point, but wanted to explicitly mention
       land use  change as the most important early warning indicator of nutrient enrichment.

3) In addition, within  the national guidance document, states should be encouraged to adopt a
   nutrient control strategy adopting at least the following set of parameters:  secchi depth,
   dissolved oxygen, total phosphorus, and  total chlorophyll).
       The group felt that this "short list" of parameters needed to be included in any state
       nutrient control program because of their scientific validity, cost, and modeling
       capability advantages  in support of lake assessment.

4) EPA should  provide simple, user-friendly, desktop-based software models to state and
   local governments to aid them in waterbody management decision making.
       This  recommendation was strongly endorsed by the members of the breakout group.
       They noted that advances in computer technology make this easier than ever to
       accomplish and identified several  existing models that could serve as starting points
       (e.g., BATHTUB, Reckhow-Simpson technique).  The group stressed that state
       personnel should  be included in the design team developing such models and that the
       models should correlate  to the recommendations outlined in the  guidance document
       (i.e.,  include the same parameters and be based  on land-use information as well as in-
       lake processes).

Gaps that Need to Be Addressed

I) The relationship between management practices and resulting load reductions is  not well
   understood.
       The fact  that  waterbody managers do not understand how much  load reduction  will be
       provided by various control practices seriously limits their ability to restore
       waterbodies to desired conditions.  It also limits their ability to argue that the benefits
       of their proposed actions outweigh the costs.

2) The relationship between nutrient loading and macrophyte growth is not well understood.
       The group realized that macrophytes can be a useful  parameter,  but that currently there
       is a lack of information  on the  relationship between  nutrient loading and macrophyte
       growth.

3) Simple models for addressing reservoirs and impoundments are not  at the same  level as
   lake  models.
       Although impoundment and reservoir models exists, the group did not feel that they
       are as  well-developed as some of the lake models. The  group realized that this was
       due to the fact  that impoundments and  reservoirs are more complicated systems that
       are more difficult to  model.
30

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	_____	.	.— Proceedings

4)  The impact of sediment loadings on nutrient enrichment is not well understood.
       The group felt that  the lack of information on the relationship between sediment
       loading and related nutrient enrichment is a gap that needs to be filled with more
       research.

Questions and Next Steps

Several questions were posed to the lakes and reservoirs breakout group by other workshop
participants.  One participant wanted to know whether or not the group had addressed the
issue of using paniculate phosphorus versus soluble phosphorus as an endpoint.  The group
answered that they had for the most part only discussed total phosphorus because it is a good
indicator in lakes and because of its cost-effectiveness. The group acknowledged the
usefulness of measuring the different phosphorus species.  Other questions that were asked
concerned such issues as:   how nutrient controls can lead to curbs on development, the
difficulty  involved with determining incremental changes in lake water quality, and how
nutrient issues should be addressed in the reauthorization of the Clean Water  Act.

After addressing these questions, the workshop participants identified several  "next steps" that
should be undertaken in regard to nutrient issues for lakes and reservoirs.

•   EPA should raise the level of priority placed on nutrients in Clean Water  section 319 and
    section 314 programs and within the regional  offices.

•   Other federal  agencies need to  be involved in this process (e.g., Corp of Engineers,
    Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. Geological Survey).

•   The North American Lake Management Society (NALMS) could serve as a forum for the
    development and regional/state implementation of a national nutrient strategy specific to
    lakes and reservoirs.

For questions and comments regarding the  lakes and reservoirs breakout group discussions,
please contact either of the following facilitators:

George Gibson                                 Bob Carlson
U.S. EPA (4304)                               Dept. of Biological Sciences
Office of  Science and Technology                Kent State University
401 M Street, SW                              Kent, Ohio 44242
Washington, DC 20460                         (216) 672-3849
(202) 260-7580                                 rcarlson@Phoenix.kent.edu
gihson.george @ epamail. epa. gov
                                                                                      3!

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                                   — Proceedings
 II.  Rivers and Streams Summary

 Session Review

 The rivers and streams breakout group began the session by reviewing some of their
 conclusions from  the previous day.  The first topic of discussion concerned  the list of
 potential endpoints for plankton dominated and periphyton dominated systems. The group
 consensus was that additional endpoints should be added to both lists.  The  participants
 considered these additional endpoints to be more of a wish list.  The group  recognized that
 the data for these endpoints might be technically difficult to obtain and the cost associated
 with such  acquisition could be prohibitive.  However, there was  a recognition  that, if possible,
 these are the types of things that really should be considered.  Table 2 lists  the additional
 endpoints  that the group agreed  should be added to the periphyton and plankton dominated
 lists.

 Table 2.  Additional  Endpoints for Plankton and Periphyton  Dominated Systems.
  Plankton Dominated
  Benthic community metabolism

  Sediment composition
    •  organics
      size fraction
      nutrients
      profile
      sediment fluxes, O2, nutrients
  Secondary production
      meiofauna, macroinvertebrates, fish
  Dissolved oxygen amplitude
  Production/respiration
Periphyton Dominated
Benthic community metabolism
     riffle/pool
Sediment composition
  •   organics
  •   size fraction
  •   nutrients
  •   profile
     sediment fluxes, O,, nutrients
Secondary production
  •   meiofauna, macroinvertebrates, fish
Dissolved oxygen amplitude
Production/respiration
The discussion then moved to a review of the plankton and periphyton dominated flow
diagrams  and graphs.  In terms of the flow diagrams, the group was generally satisfied with
the diagrams and only made a few additions.  In particular, the group agreed that the
following factors should be added.

*   Organic carbon and toxicity were added to both lists as a factors affecting algae and
    periphyton growth.  The group felt that it was  very important to consider the impact of
    organic carbon  inputs in addition to looking  at phosphorus  and nitrogen loading.

•   Total suspended solids, and other growth limiters  were added as influential factors to the
    periphyton dominated system  diagram. The  group noted that total suspended solids is a
    factor that is unique  to periphyton dominated streams.
32

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop - - - — - — - Proceedings

In reviewing both the periphyton and plankton dominated graphs, the participants noted the
following changes.

•   Plankton river graph  - participants noted that it was assumed that the plankton dominated
    rivers would behave  like lakes.  It was agreed that the graph should indicate some of the
    factors limiting algae growth such as light, travel time, and grazing.  In addition, the
    group agreed that total phosphorus would only extend to approximately 500
•  Periphyton river graph - participants felt that both nitrogen and phosphorus concentrations
   should be considered.  As a result, the group agreed to add nitrogen at 50  jjg/1 as a
   suggested threshold to the Y-axis.

Modeling

The next issue discussed by the group was the role of modeling  in understanding and
assessing nutrient loading.   The group viewed modeling as a way to explain the
interrelationships between nutrient loading and the other factors affecting biomass growth.  It
was recognized that an improved understanding of these factors would help managers control
the system.   The group was in consensus that based on the current state of our scientific
knowledge, biomass growth could not accurately be predicted in periphyton dominated
streams and rivers.  The group pointed out that our knowledge of the periphyton dominated
systems is especially poor.  Participants suggested that the national strategy needs  to give high
priority to support research and development of process oriented models to improve our level
of understanding in this area.

The group then moved into  a discussion of some of the know instances or "case studies"
where  models have been used.  Participants focused on how the  state of Montana used
modeling with a combination of other techniques in setting nutrient load targets for the Clark
Fork River.  Information from reference reaches, artificial stream experiments, and simplified
modeling, were used to define the appropriate nutrient levels or in-stream targets.  The targets
developed for the Clark Fork River are as follows:

* 6 ug/L soluble reactive phosphorus             •  30 ug/L dissolved inorganic nitrogen
• 300  ug/L total nitrogen                        *  20 ug/L total phosphorus
• Biomass 100 mg chlorophyll a/m2 mean,  150 mg/m2 max

A mass balance  nutrient model was then used for the load allocation process to ensure that in-
stream targets will be met.   It was noted that at the present time only point sources are being
considered, but future consideration will be  given to  nonpoint sources.

The next issue that the group addressed in their discussion of modeling centered on the
current state of modeling as it relates to nutrient assessment.  The discussion focused on
identifying the existing models, characterizing their complexity, and  identifying the degree to
which  these models help explain the processes in both plankton and periphyton dominated
systems. Figure 5 is a product from this discussion.  It provides information on the current

                                                                                      33

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
state of receiving water modeling for plankton and periphyton dominated systems across a
range of modeling complexity.

Figure 5.  Receiving Water Modeling.
Plankton
Load/response
relationships


QUAL2E




WASPS
CEQUAL-RIV1,
W2
HSPF
Periphyton
Concentration/
response
relationships






9
Research needs

C'
'x

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                                 Proceedings
Table 3.  Research Needs Identified by the Rivers and Streams Breakout Group
    Chlorophyll measurements (periphyton)
     - sampling methods

    Cladophora, diatom growth requirements
     - field research

    Stream bank riparian zone and denitrification

    Literature search on stream models
    (especially periphyton systems)

    Investigate dissolved oxygen & pH amplitude
Investigate community metrics to
characterize rivers for nutrient effects
  - ecoregions
  - which metrics are most sensitive
  - literature search on indicator taxa
  - is biointegrity sensitive as an early
   warning tool?

Role of fluvial geomorphology as a
factor in controlling algae development

Whole stream enrichment studies
Nutrient Loading and Use Impairment

The next major issue addressed by the group concerned the level at which biomass and
chlorophyll a concentrations begin to impair beneficial uses of rivers and streams (i.e.
recreation or aesthetics). The group felt that an understanding of this relationship was
important in establishing any kind of criteria or endpoints.  The participants felt, however, that
a set of national standards was not realistic and that it would be more appropriate on  a
ecoregional basis.

The discussion of use impairment led to an acknowledgement by the group that in
establishing any type of nutrient standards for rivers and streams the maintenance of the
designated use is of prime importance.  As a result, they felt it would be helpful to develop a
flow chart to assist in the evaluation of the control/management options that could be adopted
based on the use characterization of a waterbody.  The participants acknowledged that critical
to this process was the idea that although the relationship between  nutrient loading  and
periphyte abundance might not be fully understood, we can work from  our general
understanding of the relationship between nutrient loading  and biomass growth.  Figure 6 is
the flow chart that was  developed by the workgroup.
                                                                                          35

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                            •	 Proceedings
Figure 6,  Use Characterization and Management Options.
                                            River/Stream Lse

                                    Have biomass levels led to use imparement?
                               Restore
                                 |

                              Assess DO.
                             biomass, algae
                         Relate Nutrients to Biomass
                         Evaluate nutrient load/
                         concentration as a viable control
                         option
                         Nutrient
                         Control   Mixed
                         Program  Control   Controls

                         Determine nutrient reduction needs
                         to restore uses
                         Biological/chemical indicators
                         Check downstream protection
                         needs
        Protect
    Early Warning
     Monitoring
   Anti- Degradation
     Models, GIS
   Loading Analysis
(new development issues)
Other Management Measures

The next  issue  addressed by the group concerned the identification of management options,
other than nutrient controls, that could be implemented to maintain designated uses of streams
and rivers. Group members recognized the need for these additional measures based  upon our
understanding of systems and that the implementation of nutrient control may not be
sufficient to restore systems.  A mixed or alternative control policy  may be required,
especially in  periphyton dominated systems where nutrients are limiting only at very low
concentrations.  Table 4 contains a list of the other protection measures that were identified
by  the group.
36

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                                                                                   Proceedings
 Table 4,  Other Protection Measures Identified by the Rivers and Streams Breakout
 Group
     Shade the stream
    Riparian zone management
    Grazer habitat
    Sediment and erosion control
    Biological controls
    Cattle management
Channel type - restoration
Hydrology, hydraulics:
  -  stormwater management
  -  stream regulation
  -  flow management (scouring, freezing,
    minimum  flow)
Short Term Needs and Tasks

The group concluded the breakout session with a discussion of what needed to be done in the
short term to both improve our understanding of the eutrophication process and to enhance
modeling efforts. The group agreed that at the present time there is not enough information to
develop a complete guidance document.  Group members noted, however, that an important
first step should be to update the issue paper and provide states with the available information
in an ongoing process.  Information on available tools, measures, and case studies could assist
in the development of nutrient  control and reduction plans in the near future.  The group
recommended that the experts reconvene in approximately 3 years to discuss their progress.
Table 5 is a list of the short term needs  and tasks that should  be undertaken to update the
issue paper and to improve the science.

Table 5.  Short Term Tasks and Needs Identified by the Rivers and Streams Breakout
Group
     Literature searches on key areas
     -  stream modeling techniques
     -  community metrics
     -  designated use and biomass relationships (public survey techniques)
     Modeling
     -  add temperature simulation to the WASPS model
     -  add periphyton to the QUAL2E, WASPS, and HSPF models
     -  carbon-based simulations
     -  model maintenance and support
     -  sensitivity analysis studies
     -  sample applications
     -  land use connections in watershed-scale models
     -  improved nitrogen-phosphorus cycling on different land uses (septic, forest systems)
     Investigate seasonal relationships between nutrients
     and biomass across  streams
                                                                                          37

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	— Proceedings

Questions and Next Steps

Several questions were asked of the rivers and streams breakout group during the plenary
presentation.  The workshop participants were especially interested in discussing the use of
biological indicators as nutrient assessment endpoints.  Several of the participants felt that
because previous research in this area had proven unsuccessful, it should not be recommended
as a top EPA  priority.  Other members of the workshop argued that biological indicators are
extremely valuable since they can be easily  monitored and reflect waterbody changes  that the
public is most concerned with (i.e., loss of species).  One recurring issue was the degree to
which biological indicators can be used to determine the cause of a systemic change,  as
opposed to only detecting change itself.

Other points that were raised during this discussion included:  the need to scale endpoints in
rivers and streams (e.g., by unit substrate or depth of system); the fact that the proportion of
periphyton vs. plankton dominated systems is changing (due to increased development in
suburban areas); and the need to prioritize the recommended list of endpoints so that EPA can
specify a minimum level of effort that is expected of the states.

The next steps that were identified by the workshop participants were:

•    Involve other organizations/societies (e.g., North  American Benthological Society,
    American  Society of Limnology and  Oceanography, American Society of Civil Engineers,
    American  Geophysicists Union, and American Water Resources Association) and have
    them sponsor special sessions devoted to nutrient issues related to rivers and streams at
    their upcoming  meetings.

.    Need to move forward on the causal  linkages observed in stream community metrics.

•    Need to tap into volunteer monitoring groups as an important resource and constituency.

For questions  and comments regarding the rivers and streams breakout group discussions,
please contact either of the following facilitators:

Patrick Ogbebor                          Gene Welch
U.S. EPA (4304)                         Dept. of Civil Engineering
Office of Science and Technology         University of Washington
401  M. St.,  SW                          Seattle, WA 98195
(202) 260-6322                          (206) 543-2632
ogbehor.patrick@eparnaiLepa.gov         ebwelch@ii.washington.edu
38

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	 Proceedings

 III. Wetlands

 On the second day, the breakout group continued with parameter identification under the five
 general categories.

 Water Quality

 Parameters added to the 'water quality' category were conductivity, dissolved organic carbon,
 and conservative tracers (e.g., uranium). Each of the categories was discussed and clarified as
 to whether it related to biological or other aspects.  The issue of variability  was also
 discussed.  It was noted that the signal to noise ratio is a function of sampling frequency.
 Timing of sampling is also an important factor to consider. One point was that measures
 could be direct or indirect indicators.  A direct indicator would be an actual measurement of a
 nutrient; an  indirect indicator would be the response of vegetation to a nutrient
 overenrichment.  A question that was raised was:  how is a response measured without having
 a database with  which to compare the  samples? In order to measure a parameter, we need to
 understand what is being impacted.

 Hydrology

 Parameters that  were added were surface water inflow/outflow (input/output), water source,
 and hydroperiod.  Residence time will  be an extremely variable measurement parameter.
 Wetland area to catchment area ratio is also important.  All this background information is
 necessary to understand the processes potentially affecting wetlands.

The group agreed  to present  the following recommendations to the plenary session:

 *   There is a need for a nationwide database that characterizes wetlands as  pristine or
    impacted. This would be similar to EPA's  constructed wetlands database.  It was
    suggested that  tables be  developed  through  a comprehensive literature search showing
    what work has already been done on nutrient-related issues in wetlands.  This information
    could serve as the initial  foundation for a wetlands database, or could be added to a
    wetlands database.
•  The breakout group reorganized the list of parameters into five categories and discussed
   each parameter's relevance to monitoring.
•   A short-term strategy for addressing nutrient overenrichment issues in wetlands is needed
    be current wetlands managers; a long-term strategy incorporating ongoing research is also
   critical.
*  The Army Corps of Engineers is working on implementing the Hydrogeomorphic Wetland
   Classification system; the goal is to cover 80 percent of all wetlands, including the
   collection of a lot of variables on these wetlands.  One  issue is who will host and
    maintain the data.  Can states access these reference data  sets?  Can states add parameters
    that are important?  Impacts and functionality of wetlands are a part of this project. The
    scope could  potentially be broadened so that it can apply  to other management issues,
    such as nutrients.


                                                                                       39

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —		—~~	_____—;	;	_	 Proceedings

•  The 'Secchi Disk' of wetlands could be Feldspar (silicon dioxide) to show accumulation
   within wetlands over time as an indication of whether there has been a change in
   productivity.  Feldspar does not react with other chemicals in the soil.

Is water quality sampling for wetlands included in STORET?  No one in the group could
initially answer this question.  However, subsequent investigation found that some limited
information  is available on wetlands in STORET. In particular, Michigan and Florida have
sampling stations in  wetlands, but Michigan includes fish tissue data only.   Florida has
sampling information on wetlands, including nutrient concentrations (see Figure 7).

Figure 7. Distribution of sampling stations  in the USEPA STORET database that are
wetlands. The figure emphasizes  the sparse national distribution on wetlands data.
In the afternoon session it was discussed whether there may be a better way to classify
wetlands for understanding of nutrient impacts (i.e., other than Cowardin,  et al., 1979). The
hydrogeomorphic classification approach has three major themes - water source,
hydrodynamics, physiographic setting (includes: slope, soils, watershed).  The classification
system looks at the primary source of change.

There was further discussion on whether there is a set of indicators that can potentially extend
across all wetlands. The breakout group decided that the most productive course should be to
list all the relevant indicators and highlight the most important indicators.  Bioavailable
nitrogen  and phosphorus in sediments, soils, water, vegetation, hydrology,  and loads are the
indicators that are useful in a diagnostic study.  These indicators should provide some
indication of nutrient impacts.   One concern is that there is no baseline data available with
which to compare the collected data.  Reference sites need  to be chosen  and baseline data

40

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
determined.  This can  become the long-term database. From the baseline data, another
wetland can be analyzed and the data could support determining if the wetland is impacted or
not impacted. Because of the variability in wetland systems, the parameters cannot be
prioritized or ranked.  The group also cannot rank them as the "best" indicators to use.

Thus, long and short-term issues were simplified as follows:

Long-term — » setting up a reference baseline database
Short-term — » using a  reference site next to the impacted site

Parameters for use in a short term strategy (independent of wetland type)  include the
following:

•  Bioavailable nitrogen and phosphorus in soils and water
•  Plant species composition
*  Plant species richness
•  Plant species structure (including recruitment)
*  Plant indicator species - vascular and non vascular  species
•  Soil oxygen demand (indicator of microbial respiration)

Volunteer monitors would be able to measure everything on the  short-term list. A suggestion
was made to create several central analyzing facilities that volunteer programs could send
samples to for standardized analysis. These labs would serve as the QA/QC centers to ensure
a standardized sample  analysis.

The long-term list of measurement parameters is included in Table 6. It was suggested that a
recommendation to EPA would be to continue literature searches, especially for long-term
studies.

Models

There is a model under development for understanding how wetlands function in the
Everglades. Water budget, flow fields, vegetation, and biology are considered. This has been
calibrated against data  sets.  There are some other models on the Des Plaines wetlands and
Odum Creek (Florida)  but they do not have as large a spatial scale as the  Everglades model
does.  Spatial scale is an important aspect in assessing wetlands.  Landscape models can
address a  broader spatial scale, but  are much coarser in their ability to predict impacts. For
example, each grid is 1 km by  1 km, so there is not as much detail.  These types  of models
have shown some promise in South Florida. Additional literature searches on wetland  models
may identify other modeling approaches or applications.

The group did not address modeling efforts that compute/predict nutrient loadings to wetlands
(i.e., transport models successfully used for other water bodies),  and these may have
important roles in helping to manage loading-related impacts to wetlands.
                                                                                      41

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                              	Proceedings
Table 6.  Measurement Parameters Identified by Wetland Breakout Group
SURFACE WATER QUALITY
Total Kjeldhal nitrogen
*Ammonia
Nitrate
Soluble reactive phosphorus
Total phosphorus
Total suspended solids
Chlorophyll a
Nitrogen:phosphorus ratio
Nutrient limitation
Dissolved  oxygen
PH
Temperature
Conductivity
Dissolved  organic carbon
Conservative tracer

BIOTA
*Nitrogen
* Phosphorus
* Nitrogen: phosphorus ratio
Nutrient uptake
*Changes  in species composition
Vegetative structure
Plant species diversity/richness
Maeroinvertebratc species diversity/richness
Indicator  species
Net primary productivity
Recruitment
Leaf area/solar transmittance (remote sensing
    change detection)

HYDROLOGY
Wetland area
Depth
Transpiration
Precipitation
Residence time
Groundwater flow
Surface water inflow/outflow
Hydroperiod
Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) are "early indicators".
Parameters in bold type are parameters that are specific to one category.
SOILS
Total Kjeldhal nitrogen
Ammonia
Nitrate
Total phosphorus
Nttrogen:phosphorus ratio
*Soil oxygen demand
Sand/silt/clay fraction
Redox potential/pH
Organic accretion
Sediment accretion
Microbial biomass
Enzyme activity
Bioavailable nutrients
PROCESSES
Carbon
    microbial respiration
    Aerobic
        Water column
        Litter
        Soil
    Anaerobic
        Soil
        Sulfate reduction
        Methanogenesis
    Plant uptake
*Nitrogen
    Mineralization
    Nitrification/denitrification
    Biological nitrogen fixation
    Plant uptake
* Phosphorus
    Mineralization
    Plant uptake
    Adsorption capacity
42

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	—•	-—-	—	__ Proceedings

 Some members expressed concern that there is a gap in the availability of well-accepted
 wetland models, but other members argued that numeric models may not be useful  in
 predicting changes within wetlands.  Rather, more simple  (i.e. heuristic) models may be more
 helpful in understanding nutrient-related responses within  wetlands.

 In closing the session, the breakout group identified several information gaps in understanding
 nutrient-related impacts  to wetlands. Based on these discussions, the breakout group
 submitted a series of recommendations at the closing plenary session.

 1) There  needs to be an accepted national wetland classification system similar to the
    hydrogeomorphic classification system developed by the U.S.  Army Corp of Engineers.

 2) A comprehensive literature review needs to be undertaken with the  purpose of parameter
    and data extraction to create "threshold" table(s).

 3) A nutrient database including baseline data according to wetlands types/regions needs to
    be developed (long-term benefit).

 4) Field experimentation should be conducted to determine nutrient limitation by  wetland
    type and to isolate the effects of nutrients  from other variables, such as hydrology,
    climate, events, and natural variability.

 5) Integrate parameter data collection with wetland indicators, or possibly other EPA
    wetlands program(s).

 6)  Volunteer monitoring needs to be encouraged, as well as the development of state
    capability of monitoring.

 7)  Need to improve upon molecular biology techniques e.g., stress proteins in plants.

 8)  There needs to be further development of remote sensing techniques.

 Questions and Next Steps

 Workshop participants had several questions for the wetlands group. They wanted to know
 whether or not there are  any existing relationships for certain types of wetlands that  could be
 used to develop nutrient  assessment  and management tools. The wetlands group responded
by pointing out that this  research area is in its infancy compared to work that has already
been done for the other waterbody types.  Workshop participants also inquired about how the
hypothetical wetlands database would be organized and what information it would provide to
resource managers.

The next steps that were identified were:
                                                                                       43

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop •—	—____________	.	___	_ Proceedings

•   Involve organizations such as the State Association of Wetlands Managers,  Society of
    Wetlands Scientists, and private organizations (e.g., Ducks Unlimited) in the development
    and implementation of the wetlands component of the national nutrient assessment
    strategy.

•   Need to synthesize the results from the workshop with a proposal for how to proceed
    from  here.

•   Need to better articulate the level of concern about nutrient overenrichment of natural
    wetlands and communicate to policymakers and the public.

»   Need to synthesize information on the relative sensitivity of different wetlands types  to
    nutrient enrichment and use this information to investigate regressional relationships.

For questions  and  comments  regarding the  wetlands breakout group discussions, please
contact:

Bob Cantilli                              Kristen Martin
U.S. EPA (4304)                         U.S. EPA (4503F)
Office of Science and Technology         Office of Wetlands, Oceans and Watersheds
401 M. St., SW                           401 M. St. SW
Washington, DC 20460                   Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-5546                           (202) 260-7108
cantilli.robert@epamail.epa.gov            martin.kristen@epamail.epa.gov
44

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	—	— Proceedings

 IV.  Estuaries and Coastal Waters

 Over the course of the workshop, several major themes and recommendations emerged from
 the group's detailed discussions.  Perhaps the most pervading challenge in establishing tools
 and  standards for assessment and management of nutrient inputs to aquatic systems is the fact
 that  large,  real variability exists in physical and biological structure and processes among all
 systems. This variability means that a given input results in a different response.  While
 science may agree qualitatively about the expected response, quantitative prediction is rarely
 if ever possible with acceptable confidence limits.  In addition, regional differences exist in
 human/societal expectations  so that what condition is "acceptable" is  also not uniform. Taken
 together, these perspectives suggest that arbitrarily defined standards  of general applicability
 may be untenable, and strongly call for a different approach.

 Most of the group's effort was initially directed toward what metrics  seem meaningful,
 rigorous, and yet practically  useful in the assessment of effects.  The group set  aside for  the
 moment the issue of subjective definition of standards of what is acceptable or  unacceptable
 as a  basis for regulation.  However these standards are defined, they  must be based on
 acceptable  measures of dose response.

 Faced with this, the estuaries work group approached a consensus that the only practical
 initial approach is to construct empirical relationships between indicator responses and
 probable driving variables.  This is essentially the approach taken by  Vollenweider in
 documenting responses of lakes to phosphorus  loading. Some examples of these empirical
 relationships are clearly significant statistically, but they display large variability, even for
 comparable estuaries.  For only  plankton-based systems, for example, chlorophyll stocks  show
 a 10-fold range in response for similar inputs of total nitrogen.  For other types of systems,
 however, such  relationships have not been adequately explored.  It is  recommended that
 significant  effort be  devoted  to a careful gathering of available information for a variety of
 systems, and an incisive analysis of relationships.  It must be emphasized that this is not  a
 menial task.  Care and insight are necessary to evaluate each published study to assure
 appropriate comparisons are  made.

 A benefit of this approach  is that the power of the method will increase with time.  As more
 information becomes available, three  significant areas of progress in the empirical approach
 may  be anticipated.  First, separate relationships may be developed for different types of
 systems, effectively  stratifying the variance among more similar groups of sites (e.g. micro-
 vs. macrotidal). The group separated benthic, seagrass, and plankton  based systems with  this
rationale.  Second, schemes for parameterizing multiple factors may be developed within
which tighter relationships may  be possible (e.g., Vollenweider's parameter normalized
phosphorus  input to freshwater turnover time).   Third, as time series of data for an increasing
number of cases become available, tighter relationships will emerge, more strongly suggesting
site specific predictive relationships.

In some cases, natural year-to-year variability  may define the dose-response quite accurately
for a given system.  This empirical approach guarantees a number of benefits.  With time, the

                                                                                       45

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—                   Proceedings

archive of systems for which diagnostic dose-response measurements are available will
increase.  Thus the use of empirical relationships has  immediate value, but is also perfect
stimulus  for adaptive management using the more predictive relationships that will emerge
with time.

Seagrass  Dominated Systems

Tools

•   Areal  survey of seagrasses (aerial photography/mapping/digitization; ground surveys via
    transects) to document distribution, abundance, and depth penetration of seagrass beds.

•   Simple to complex nutrient loading models of the surrounding watershed and water
    quality models for simulating chlorophyll a concentrations over the seagrass beds.

•   Methodologies for partitioning out the various water column light attenuators (e.g.,
    chlorophyll a, inorganic suspended solids, color) to determine the relative contribution due
    to nutrient enrichment:

    -   Multiple regressions of various  fractions of total suspended solids, color, chlorophyll
       a, etc.  using multi-wavelength spectral methods
    -   Literature values of specific extinction coefficient (chlorophyll a)
    -   Light transmission models (e.g., Gallegos 1994)

•   The 20% incident light requirement that holds up across a range of seagrass species
    (recognizing one has to consider both water column and leaf surface attenuation due to
    epiphytes at the site/waterbody specific level).

•   Field  tested protocols for designing, conducting, and analyzing results from water quality
    monitoring along seagrass  gradients (depth penetration, vegetated to non-vegetated, and
    water quality gradients).

«   Field  tested protocols for assessing relationships between seagrass depth penetration vs.
    light attenuation coefficient to determine waterbody specific light requirements.

•   Host  of field tested/possible  early warning indicators of pending seagrass declines:

    -   C:N:P ratios in above- and below-ground tissue, blade width, Hsat, quantum
       irradience,  leaf chlorophyll a, chlorophyll  a to b ratios, stable isotope.

Next Steps

•   Sort  out the light requirements over different regional habitats of the dominant seagrass
    species from the existing  wealth of literature.
 46

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop			——	—	 Proceedings

 *   Determine, synthesize and publish thresholds for nutrient concentrations, light penetration,
    total suspended solids, chlorophyll a, etc. under different environmental conditions (e.g.,
    temperature) based on the current and soon to be published literature.

 •   Through a workshop/working group, develop an approach which will enable states and
    estuarine/coastal management programs with minimal to no existing SAV survey data (but
    with historical or ongoing seagrass declines) to set:  1) light and nutrient thresholds, 2)
    depth penetration restoration goals, 3) distribution restoration goals, 4)  and seagrass
    resource restoration based nutrient reduction goals for the surrounding  watershed.

 •   Assemble a  series of  teams of experts to actively assist these states and estuarine/coastal
    management programs in the design and conduct of the necessary studies and data
    interpretations.

 •   Publish a full accounting  of the approaches taken in Chesapeake Bay and Florida for
    using seagrasses to set nutrient reduction targets in a form for ready application to other
    semi-tropical to temperate systems.

 •   Pull from the literature simplified versions of the land use mosaic/nutrient loadings
    relationships.

 •   Devote greater effort  to modeling in  seagrass restoration given  actual or predicted water
    quality changes based on  the reproductive biology of the waterbody's species.

 •   Identify species-appropriate early warning indicators, synthesize the literature supporting
    field validation/case study verification of the utility of these indicators,  and work to build
    these indicators into ongoing and planned seagrass monitoring programs to build up the
    requisite  data base.

Plankton Dominated Systems

Tools

 •   A range of empirical  relationships and more limited set of models connecting nutrient
    loadings  and  "top-down" trophic influences interacting to control phytoplankton
    production.

•   Techniques for separating photopigments into chlorophyll a and other diagnostic pigments
    (chlorophylls and carotenoids) with analysis by HPLC and C,4 incorporation.  These
    techniques can provide insight into the composition and growth rates  of the algae in order
    to predict algae composition in  response to nutrient enrichment,

•   Field tested techniques and instrumentation necessary to establish monitoring stations to
    define a dissolved oxygen fluctuation signature for a system.
                                                                                        47

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop 	—	Proceedings

•  Techniques for general source discrimination using N,5 and C,4 stable isotopes,

•  Satellite/aerial imagery and interpretation techniques to display chlorophyll a and other
   diagnostic pigment patterns with much greater spatial resolution and estimate surficial
   primary productivity.

•  In-depth information about the sometimes-complex life cycles of some species.

•  Scanning and transmission electron microscopy to aid in identification of picoplankton
   (e.g., brown tide organisms) and other phytoplankton componenets (e.g., small
   dinoflagellates).

•  Mesocosms for  studying species succession and community- or ecosystem-level response
   to nutrient inputs.

•  Molecular probes for rapid, reliable species detection, identification and enumeration.

Next Steps

•  Need to further examine the role of silica relative to  nitrogen and phosphorus (silica
   depletion in phytoplankton blooms).

•  Need to take the short list of key questions that keep coming up  again and again in these
   types of workshop but never get resolved and bring together a group drawn from key
   parts of the community (Estuarine Research Federation, American Society of Limnology
   and Oceanography, Benthic Society, NOAA, EPA, and others) to synthesize the existing
   information and come to a conclusion.

«  Need to develop more comprehensive dissolved oxygen tolerance/effects thresholds for
   systems beyond Virginian Province (Cape Cod to Cape Hatteras) supporting waterbody
   specific determination of dissolved oxygen criteria.

•  Need to tackle the question of what amount of dissolved oxygen fluctuations are due to
   natural vs. anthropogenic causes.

«  Need technological refinements in  the areas of bioindicators and sensors of nutrient
   enrichment. Specifically, there is a need for indicators capable of reflecting natural
   community responses.

 •   Need an equivalent set of relationships for plankton dominated systems for nutrient
    loadings to chlorophyll a response (estuarine version of the Vollenweider relationships).

 •   Continue to unravel the complex life cycles of some abundant algal taxa, and to determine
    nutritional controls on stage dominance.
 48

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —	—	—		. Proceedings

 •   Further examine the role of changing N:P ratios on shifts in phytoplankton dominance
    from desirable to undesirable species, and the role of silica in these species shifts,

 Nuisance Algal Blooms

 Harmful Nontoxic Algal Blooms

 Tools

 •   A range of empirical relationships connecting nutrient loading with species growth and
    abundance.

 •   Techniques for separating photopigments into chlorophyll a and other diagnostic pigments
    (chlorophylls and carotenoids) with analysis by HPLC and C14 incorporation.  These
    techniques can provide insight into the composition and growth rates of the algae in order
    to predict algae composition in response to nutrient enrichment.

 •   Field tested techniques and instrumentation necessary to establish monitoring  stations to
    define a dissolved oxygen fluctuation signature for a system.

 •   Techniques for general source discrimination using N,5 and C,4 stable isotopes.

 *   Satellite/aerial imagery and interpretation techniques to display chlorophyll a  and other
    diagnostic pigment patterns with much greater spatial resolution and estimate  surficial
    primary productivity.

 •   In-depth information about the sometimes-complex life cycles of some species.

 •   Scanning and transmission electron microscopy to aid in identification of picoplankion
    (e.g., brown tide organisms) and other phytoplankton componenets (e.g., small
    dinoflagellates).

 •   Mesocosms for studying species succession and community- or ecosystem-level response
    to nutrient inputs.

 «   Molecular probes for rapid, reliable species detection, identification and enumeration.

Next Steps

 •   Need to further examine the role of silica relative to nitrogen  and phosphorus (silica
    depletion in phytoplankton blooms),

«   Initiate long term monitoring to collect data to provide the basis for correlating brown tide
    blooms with nutrient enrichment.
                                                                                      49

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	— Proceedings

•  Test laboratory based findings  in controlled field experimentation.

•  Support a more comprehensive synthesis of correlative/experimental evidence for brown
   tide blooms responses to nutrient enrichment.

•  Continue to unravel the life cycles of harmful nontoxic algal taxa, and to determine
   nutritional  controls on stage dominance.

*  Continue to develop/improve molecular probes to detect, identify and enumerate harmful
   algal species.

•  Continue to develop isotopic methods to trace the source of nutrients to harmful algal
   bloom species and to determine relative importance of natural versus anthropogenic
   nutrient inputs  in stimulating their growth.

•  Improve remote-sensing algorithms for  detecting harmful algal blooms and the water
   masses with which they are associated.

•  Establish long-term monitoring programs for both bloom-forming (e.g., brown tide
   species) and low-abundance harmful species (e.g., "needle" forming diatoms such as
   Chaetoceros concavicornis), in order to document major trends and linkages to cultural
   eutrophication.

•  Identify nontoxic harmful algal bloom species that can serve as "indicators" of different
   types or conditions of eutrophication. Develop these species as indices of ecosystem
   "stress."

•  Determine nutrient uptake characteristics and requirements for key  nontoxic harmful algal
   bloom species, allowing for the sensitivity of many harmful species to mixing conditions
   and enclosure effects.

•  Determine the interactions of both inorganic and organic nutrient sources in stimulating
   nontoxic harmful algal bloom species.

•  Develop physicological indicators of nutrient limitation in nontoxic harmful algal bloom
   species to assess  their nutrient  status under both natural and nutrient enriched  conditions,
   and including consideration of both  nutrient supplies  and supply ratios.

Toxic Algal Blooms

Tools

«  A range of empirical relationships connecting nutrient loading with species growth and
   abundance.
50

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop - ———	—	—	,	 Proceedings

 •  Techniques  for separating photopigments into chlorophyll a and other diagnostic pigments
    (chlorophylls and carotenoids) with analysis by HPLC and CI4 incorporation.  These
    techniques can provide insight into the composition and growth rates of the algae in order
    to predict algae composition  in response to nutrient enrichment.

 «  Field tested  techniques and instrumentation necessary to establish monitoring stations to
    define a dissolved oxygen fluctuation signature for a system.

 •  Techniques for general source discrimination using N,5 and C,4 stable isotopes.

 «  Satellite/aerial imagery and interpretation techniques to display chlorophyll a and other
    diagnostic pigment patterns with much greater spatial resolution and estimate surficial
    primary productivity.

 •  In-depth information about the sometimes-complex life cycles of some species.

 •   Scanning and transmission electron  microscopy to aid in identification of picoplankton
    (e.g., brown  tide organisms) and other phytoplankton cornponenets (e.g., small
    dinoflagellates).

 •   Mesocosms for studying species succession and community- or ecosystem-level response
    to nutrient inputs.

 •   Molecular probes for rapid, reliable species detection, identification  and enumeration.

Next Steps

•   Initiate long  term local and regional monitoring to collect data to provide the basis for
    correlating toxic algal blooms with nutrient enrichment.

•   Test laboratory based findings with controlled field experimentation.

•   Utilize bioindicators (molecular, immunological) of linkage between nutrient enrichment
    and toxic/harmful characteristics of algal blooms.

•   Support a more comprehensive synthesis of correlative/experimental evidence for toxic
    algal  blooms responses to nutrient enrichment.

•   Assessment of effects of other variables on  nutrient contribution to nuisance tide
    generation.

•   Examine linkage between newly-recognized and growing local/regional sources of
    nutrients and bloom dynamics in estuarine and coastal waters (i.e., atmospheric deposition
    and groundwater).
                                                                                       51

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —	—————~	Proceedings

•  Need to further examine the role of silica relative to nitrogen and phosphorus (silica
   depletion in phytoplankton blooms).

•  Techniques for separating photopigments into chlorophyll a and other diagnostic pigments
   (chlorophylls and carotenoids)  with  analysis by HPLC and C14 incorporation.  These
   techniques can provide insight  into the composition and growth rates of the algae  in order
   to predict algae composition in response to nutrient enrichment.

•  Initiate long term monitoring to collect data to provide the basis for correlating brown tide
   blooms with nutrient enrichment.

•  Test laboratory based findings  in controlled field experimentation.

«  Support a more comprehensive synthesis of correlative/experimental evidence for brown
   tide blooms responses to nutrient enrichment.

«  Continue to unravel the life cycles of harmful toxic algal taxa, and to determine
   nutritional controls on stage  dominance and toxin production.

*  Continue to develop/improve molecular probes to detect, identify and enumerate harmful
   algal species, and to detect/quantify toxins.

•  Continue to identify and characterize toxin bioaccumulation impacts through food webs.

•  Establish research efforts to  determine chronic sublethal impacts of toxic algal species on
   life history stages of dominant herbivores and predators (e.g., shellfish and finfish), and
   the influence of nutrient overenrichment in exacerbating these impacts.

•  Continue to develop isotopic methods to trace the source of nutrients to harmful algal
   bloom species  and  to determine relative importance of natural versus anthropogenic
   nutrient inputs in stimulating their growth.

•  Improve remote-sensing algorithms  for detecting harmful algal blooms and the water
   masses with which they are  associated.

•  Establish long-term monitoring programs for both bloom-forming (e.g., brown tide
   species) and low-abundance harmful species (e.g.,  "needle" forming diatoms such as
   Chaetoceros concavicornis), in order to document  major trends and linkages to cultural
   eutrophication.

•  Identify nontoxic harmful algal bloom species that can serve as "indicators" of different
   types or conditions of eutrophication. Develop these species as indices of ecosystem
   "stress."
52

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	——	——		 Proceedings

 •  Determine nutrient uptake characteristics and requirements for key nontoxic harmful algal
    bloom species, allowing for the sensitivity  of many harmful species to mixing conditions
    and enclosure effects.

 •  Determine the interactions of both inorganic and organic nutrient sources in stimulating
    toxic  harmful algal bloom species.

 •  Develop physieological indicators of nutrient limitation in toxic harmful algal bloom
    species to assess their nutrient status under both natural and nutrient enriched conditions,
    and including consideration of both nutrient supplies and supply ratios.

 Macroalgae Dominated Systems

 Tools

 •  NI5 signature connecting wastewater effluent with macroalgae.

 Next Steps

 •   Compile the various seagrass/macroalgae/phytoplankton/nutrient loadings data sets (e.g.,
    Florida Bay, Tampa Bay, MERL, Waquiot  Bay, MA, Great Bay, NH) and further confirm
    the paradigm shift  and pull out  the thresholds relating to these community shifts.

 •   Quantify the relationship between fish diversity, macroalgal cover, and nutrient loading.

 •   Quantify the macroalgae influence on dissolved oxygen concentrations, dissolved organic
    carbon concentrations, and lower trophic levels.

 Questions

There were several questions and issues raised  at the conclusion of the estuaries and coastal
waters plenary session  presentation.  One participant recommended that endpoints be used
cautiously until the basic science underlying these types systems is more well understood; he
was concerned about making too many decisions based solely on empirical relationships.
Other participants emphasized the importance (as well  as the difficulty) of determining
accurate land use loading estimates and recommended  that biologists and engineers work
together to confront this technical gap.  Other comments that were voiced included:  taking a
linked  management/science  approach and keeping in mind the significance of spatial and
temporal scales in  regard to the nutrient overenrichment issue.
For questions and comments regarding the estuaries and coastal waters breakout group
discussions, please contact either of the following facilitators:
                                                                                      53

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —	•	—	—	Proceedings

Rich Batiuk                              Jim Kremer
U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program        Professor of  Marine Sciences
410 Severn Avenue Suite 109             University of Connecticut
Annapolis, MD 21403                    Avery Point  Campus
(410) 267-5731                           2084 Shennecosset Road
batiuk.richard@epamail.epa.gov           Groton, CT 06340-6097
                                         (860) 445-3407
V. Workshop Wrap-up4

The workshop concluded with Rich Batiuk outlining EPA's plans for carrying the nutrient
overenrichment issue forward.  These plans include distributing the draft proceedings to
workshop participants along with revised versions of the issue papers for review and
comment.  A draft national Nutrient Assessment Strategy will be drafted based on input from
the workshop and presented to  EPA Program Offices,  EPA Regional Offices, ORD
laboratories, federal agencies, states, and professional societies in the spring of 1996 for
review and comment.  A draft final strategy may then be submitted to the Science Advisory
Board in the summer of  1996 and a final EPA strategy will be published in the fall of 1996.
       4Siimmaries of the overheads used during the workshop wrap-up are included at the end of the
proceedings.

54

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop -—	———-——	——	 Proceedings

                                Appendix
  Agenda
  List of Workshop Participants
  Participant Addresses
  Summary of Overheads

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                                                      •— Proceedings
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop Agenda
December 4-6, 1995
Washington, D.C.
December 4
                  Theme:   Waterbody Type-based Endpoints,
                             Assessment Methodologies & Models
Plenary Session

8:30 am - 9:00 am

9:00 am - 9:15 am


9:15 am - 9:30 am



9:30 am - 10:30 am
10:30 am -  11:00 am
Registration (1st Floor Meeting Room)

Welcome, Purpose & Goals of the Workshop, Introductions
(Rich Batiuk, EPA Chesapeake Bay Program Office)

Introductory Remarks
(Tudor Davies, Director, Office of Science and Technology, and Robert
Way land, Director, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds)

Past, Present, and Future Perspectives  on the Assessment and Management
of Nutrient Overenrichment Needs
(Robert Thomann, Manhattan College; Mimi Dannel US EPA HQ (invited);
and Steve Heiskary, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency)

Purpose & Goals of the Workshop; Purpose of Breakout Groups and Charge
to Breakout Groups
(Rich Batiuk, EPA Chesapeake Bay Program Office)
Concurrent Breakout Groups - Waterbody Type-based Issues

11:00 am -  12:00 pm     Breakout Groups (Organization & Planning)

                       For the morning and afternoon sessions, there will be 4 concurrent breakout
                       groups, organized according to waterbody type: estuaries and coastal waters;
                       lakes, impoundments, ponds; rivers and streams; and wetlands.

                       Each breakout group will have a facilitator, a synthesizer, and a recorder.
                       Each breakout group will be asked to discuss and come to consensus on a
                       number of issues and questions.  Specific questions and background
                       materials will be provided in advance of the  workshop to enable participants
                       to prepare for workshop discussions.

12:00 pm -  1:00 pm      LUNCH (on your own)

Concurrent Breakout Groups - Waterbody Type-based Issues

1:00 pm - 5:30 pm       Continuation of Breakout Groups

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	__	_	_	.—	.	 procee(fa

 December 5                                Theme:   Cross-cutting Issues - Integration of
                                                      Tools Across Waterbody Types and
                    	Geographical Areas

 Concurrent Breakout Groups - Waterbody Type-based Issues

 8:30 am - 10:30 am       Continuation and Closure of Breakout Group Discussions

 10:30 am - 10:45 am      BREAK

Plenary Session

 10:45 am - 11:45 am      Brief Synthesis Reports from Breakout Groups & Discussion

 11:45 am - 12:00 pm      Purpose of Afternoon Breakout Group Discussions and  Charge to Breakout
                         Groups

 12:00 pm - 1:00 pm       LUNCH (on your own)

Concurrent Breakout Groups • Cross-Cutting Issues

1:00 pm- 5:30 pm        Breakout Groups

                         Workshop participants will return to their breakout groups to discuss and
                        come to consensus  on a new set of issues and questions directed toward
                        cross-cutting issues.  The focus of these breakout groups will be on how
                        appropriate tools can be applied to accomplish nutrient management goals
                        and the transferability of various tools across waterbody types and
                        geographically and  ecologically diverse areas. Participants  will also be
                        asked to begin to identify and prioritize user needs and the  steps needed to
                        address these needs.

                        Breakout groups will again have a facilitator, a synthesizer, and a recorder.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop

December 6
                   Theme:
	———	— Proceedings

 Strategy for Development & Validation
 of Needed Nutrient Assessment Tools
 (Bringing Everything Together)
Plenary Session

8:30 am- 10:00 am

10:00 am - 12:00 pm
12:00 pm - 12:30 pm
12:30 pm
Reports from Breakout Groups & Discussion

Synthesis - Developing a Strategy

As a group, participants will identify and prioritize the available tools for
addressing  nutrient overenrichment that should be promoted and refined.  In
addition, we will try to identify and rank new tool development needs.
Participants will be asked to discuss and evaluate a straw EPA strategy  and
create a "to do list" for EPA .  Finally, the group will begin to brainstorm
potential roles and responsibilities of other state, regional, federal, and
academic nutrient assessment partners within the context of a  larger national
strategy framework.

Wrap-up & Next Steps
(Rich Batiuk, EPA Chesapeake Bay Program Office)

ADJOURN
Note:  Following the workshop, EPA will produce a meeting summary, including revised versions of
       the issue papers used at the workshop,  and a draft of EPA '$ strategy document.  This will be
       provided to all workshop participants for review and comment.

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	—		 proceedings

                National Nutrient Assessment Workshop—List of
                         Participants by Breakout Group

 Estuaries and Coastal Waters

 Rich Batiuk, U.S. EPA,  Chesapeake Bay Program Office
 Suzanne Bricker, NOAA Office of Resources Conservation and Assessment
 Tom Brosnan, NY City Harbor Monitoring Program
 JoAnn Burkholder, North Carolina State University
 Dominic DiToro, HydroQual Inc.
 Ken Dunton, University  of Texas Marine Sciences Institute
 Alan Hais, U.S.  EPA, Office of Science and  Technology
 Joe Hall, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
 Michael Kemp, University of Maryland
 Jim  Kremer, University of Connecticut
 Brian LaPointe, Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institute
 Virginia Lee, University of Rhode Island
 George Loeb, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
 Chris Madden, University of Maryland
 Wayne Magley, Florida Department of Environmental Regulation
 Hassan Mirsajadi, Delaware Department of Natural Resources & Environmental Control
 Scott Nixon, University of Rhode Island
 Cynthia Nolt, U.S.  EPA, Office of Science and Technology
 Hans Paerl, University of North Carolina
 Ruth Swanek, North Carolina Department of  Environment, Health & Natural Resources
 David Tomasko,  Sarasota Bay National Estuary
 Ivan Valiela, Boston University Marine Program
 Steve Weisberg,  Senior Scientist, VERSAR, Inc.

 Lakes, Reservoirs, and Ponds

 Robert Carlson, Kent State University
Steve Chapra, University of Colorado
Jeroen Gerritsen, Tetra Tech, Inc.
George Gibson, U.S. EPA, Office of Science  and Technology
Steve Heiskary, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency
Dianne Reid, North Carolina  Division of Environmental Management
Joel Salter, U.S. EPA, Office of Science and Technology
Eric Smeltzer, Vermont Department  of Environmental Quality
Robert Thomann, Manhattan College

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	——	—•	———— Proceedings

Riverg=and Streams

Dennis Anderson, Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment
Dan Butler, Oklahoma Conservation Commission
Mimi  Dannel, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
Gary Ingman, Montana Water Quality Division
Russ Kinerson, U.S. EPA,  Office of Science and Technology
Jerry LaVeck, U.S. EPA, Office of Science and Technology
Lewis Linker, U.S. EPA, Chesapeake Bay Program Office
Winston Lung,  Univerity of Virginia
Dennis Newbold, Stroud Water Research Center
Patrick Ogbebor, U.S. EPA, Office of Science and Technology
Greg Searle, Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources
Leslie Shoemaker, Tetra Tech, Inc.
Amy Sosin, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
Sam Stribling, Tetra Tech, Inc.
Gene Welch, University of Washington

Wetlands

Darryl Brown, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
Bob Cantilli, U.S. EPA, Office of Science and Technology
Tom Fontaine, South Florida Water Management District
Andy  Hooten, Tetra Tech,  Inc.
Kristen Martin, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
Jarnes Morris, University of South Carolina
Ramesh Reddy, University of Florida
Doreen Robb, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
William Sipple, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands,  Oceans, and Watersheds

-------
     National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                                                                               	 Proceedings
                                    Participant Addresses
 Dennis Anderson
 Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment
 WQ Control Division
 4300 Cherry Creek Drive South
 Denver, CO 80222-1530
 (303) 692-2000
 Tom Brosnan
 DEP - Bureau of Clean Water
 Marine Sciences Section
 New York City Harbor Monitoring Program
 Room 213
 Wards Island, NY 10035
 (212)860-9378

 Joann Burkholder
 Department of Botany
 Box 7162
 North Carolina State
 Raleigh, NC 27645
 (919)515-2726
joannj>urkholder@ncsu. edu

 Robert Carlson
 Department of Biological Sciences
 Kent State University
 Kent, OH 44242
 (216)672-3849
 rcarlson@Phoenix. kent. edu
 Rich Batiuk
 US EPA
 Chesapeake Bay Program Office
 410 Severn Avenue, Suite 109
 Annapolis, MD 21403
 (410)267-5731
 batiuk, richard@epatnaiL epa.gov

 Suzanne Bricker
 NOAA  ORCA1 SSMC4
 Office of Resources Conservation and Assessment
 1305 East-West Highway
 Silver Spring, MD 20910
 (301) 713-3000, ext. 200
 Sbricker@seamail. nos. noaa. gov

 Dan Butler
 Oklahoma Conservation Commission
 1000 West Wilshire Boulevard
 Suite 123
 Oklahoma City, OK 73116
 (405) 858-2006
Bob Cantilli
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St.,  SW
Washington, DC 20460
cantilli. robert©epamail, epa. gov
Steve Chapra
University of Colorado
College of Engineering and Applied Science
Campus Box 428
Boulder, CO 80309-0428
(303) 492-7573
Dominic DiToro
HydroQual Inc.
1 Lethbridge Plaza
Mahwah, NJ 07430
(201) 529-5151
dditoro@hydroqual. com
Ken Dunton
University of Texas
Marine Science Institute
Box 1267
Port Aransas, TX 78373
(512)749-6744
dunton©utmsi. zo. utexas. edu
Tom Fontaine
South Florida Water Management District
3301 Gun Club Rd
West Palm Beach, FL 33416
(407) 686-6551
tom.fontaine@sjwmd. gov

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                        Proceedings
Charles Gal legos
Smithsonian Environmental Research Center
P.O. Box 28
Edgewater, MD21037
(410) 798-4424
Gallegos®SERC. SI. edu
Jeroen Gerritsen
Tetra Tech, Inc.
10045 Red Run Blvd.
Suite 110
Owings Mills, MD 21117
(410) 356-8993
George Gibson
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-7580
gibson. george@epamail, epa, gov

Steve Heiskary
Minnesota Pollution Control Agency
520 Lafayette Road
St. Paul, MN55155
(612)296-7217
Steven. heiskary@pca. state, mn. us
Michael Kemp
University of Maryland-CEES
Horn Point Environmental Laboratory
P.O. Box 775
Cambridge, MD 21613
(410)221-8436
Alan Hais
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-1306
ha is. alan@epamail. epa. gov

Gary Ingman
Water Quality Division
Montana Department of Environmental Quality
1520 E. 6th Avenue
PO Box 200901
Helena, MT 59620-0901
(406) 444-5320

Russ Kinerson
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-1330
kinerson. russell@epama.il, epa. gov
Jim Kremer
Professor of Marine Sciences
University of Connecticut
Avery Point Campus
2084 Shennecosset Road
Groton, CT 06340-6097
(860) 445-3407
Brian LaPointe
Harbor Branch Oceanographic Institute
2190 Ivess Isle Road #6
Palm Beach, FL 33480
(305) 872-2247
lapointe@gate.net
Jerry LaVeck
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-7771
laveck.jerry@epamail, epa.gov
Virginia Lee
University of Rhode Island
Bay Campus
Marine Resources Building
Narragansett, RI 02882
(401) 792-6224

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —
                                                                                Proceedings
Lewis Linker
U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program Office
410 Severn Avenue
Annapolis, MD 21403
(410) 267-5741
linker. lewis®epamail. epa. gov
Winston Lung
Department of Civil Engineering
Univerity of Virginia
Thornton Hall D209
Charlottesville, VA 22903
(804) 924-3722
wl@virginia. edu

Wayne Magley
Florida Department of Environmental Regulation
Twin Towers
2600 Blair Stone Rd
Tallahassee, FL 32399-2400
(904) 488-0780
Hassan Mirsajadi
Delaware Dept. of Natural Resources
 and Environmental Control
89 Kings Highway
PO Box 1401
Dover, DE 19903
(302) 739-4590
George Loeb
US EPA (4305F)
Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-0670
loeb, george@epamail. epa. gov

Chris Madden
University of Maryland-CEES
Horn Point Environmental Laboratory
PO Box 775
Cambridge, MD 21613
(410)221-8436
madden@hpel. umd. edu

Kristen Martin
US EPA(4503F)
Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
401 M St.,  SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-7108
martin. kristen@epamail. epa.gov

James T. Morris
Department of Biological  Sciences
University of South Carolina
Columbia, SC 29208
(803) 777-3948
morris®ds. biol. sc. edu
Dennis Newbold
Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences
Stroud Water Research Center
512 Spencer Rd. Avondale, PA 19311
(610) 268-2153, ext 227
Newbold@say. acnatsq. org
Scott Nixon
University of Rhode Island
Sea Grant College
South Ferry Road
Narragansett, RI 02882
(401) 792-6800
Cynthia Nolt
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 2604940
nolt. cynthia@epamaU. epa. gov
Patrick Ogbebor
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-6322
ogbebor.patrick@epamail. epa. gov

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
                       Proceedings
Hans Paer!
University of North Carolina
Institute of Marine Sciences
3431 Arendell St
Morehead City, NC 28557-3209
(919) 726-6841
hpaerl@email. unc. edu
Ramesh Reddy
University of Florida
Soil and Water Science Department
Gainesville, FL 32611
(904) 392-8462
Dianne Reid
North Carolina Division of Environmental Management
P.O. Box 27687
Raleigh, NC 27611-7687
(919) 733-5083, ext. 568
dianner@dem. ehnr. state, nc. us
Joel S alter
US EPA (4304)
Office of Science and Technology
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-8484
salter.joel@epamail, epa, gov
Greg Searle
Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources
PO Box 7921
Madison, WI 53707-7921
(608) 267-7644
searlg@dnr, state, wi. us
Leslie Shoemaker
Tetra Tech, Inc.
10306 Eaton Place, Suite 340
Fairfax, VA 22030
(703) 385-6000
ltshoemy@planetcom. com
Eric Smeltzer
Vermont Department of Environmental Quality
Water Quality Division
103 South Main Street
Waterbury, VT 05671
(802) 241-3770
Amy Sosin
US EPA (4305F)
Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and Watersheds
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
(202) 260-7058
sos in. amy@epamail. epa.gov
James Stribling
Tetra Tech, Inc.
 10045 Red Run Blvd.
Suite 110
Owings Mills, MD21117
(410) 356-8993
Ruth Swanek
NC Division of Environmental Management
P.O. Box 29535
Raleigh, NC 27626-0535
(919) 733-5083
ruth@dem. ehnr. state, nc. us
 Robert Thomann
 Manhattan College
 Department of Environmental Engineering and Science
 Manhattan College Parkway
 Riverdale, NY 10471
 (718)920-0100, ext. 947
David Tomasko
Sarasota Bay National Estuary
1990 Ken Thompson Parkway
Sarasota, FL 34236
(813) 483-5970

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	.		 Proceedings
           Ivan Valiela                                  Steve Weisber
           Boston University Marine Program              VERSAR
           Marine Biological Laboratory                   9200 Rumsey Road
           Woods Hole, MA 02543                       Columbia, MD 21045
           (508) 289-7515                               (410)  268-6844
                                                        weisbergste@ver$ar. com

           Eugene Welch
           Department of Civil Engineering
           University of Washington
           Seattle, WA 98195
           (206) 543-2632
           ebwelch@u. Washington. edu

           Acknowledged contributor to the estuaries
           and coastal waters section of the
           proceedings:

           Don Anderson
           Department of Biology
           Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution
           Woods Hole, MA 02543
           (508) 457-2000, ext. 2351
           danderson@whoi. edu

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop ——;	—	       _____  ___   _ Proceedings

          Summary of Overheads Used in Day One Plenary Session

Robert Thomann, Manhattan College

I.  Nutrient assessment & management—A long history:  two periods
 A.  Observational Descriptive (Beginning c.  1930)
 B.  Predictive Management (Beginning c. 1965)

II.  Observational descriptive period (c. 1930)
 A.  Juday,  Birge, Hutchinson, Sawyer, Mortimer, Kethem
 B.  Known:  Adverse Effects of High Loading: Estuaries, Lakes, Rivers
 C.  Known:  Limiting Nutrient Concentration IN 30: IP 10 ug/L
 D,  Known:  Nutrient Loadings; Point (Sewage), Non-Point (Farms, Urban, Atmospheric)
 E.   NOT KNOWN:  How to Relate Loading to Water Body  Response

III.  Predictive management period (c. 1965)
 A.  Critical Loading Models for Lakes
   1. Vollenweider:
     a.  Feb.  16 & 17th, 1966, Paris. OECD request: Gather the eutrophication literature, but
        with   the hope that "...the report would have a 'practical' bias and not be too
        'scientific'"
 B.  First Model to Relate Nutrient Loading to Lake Trophic Status
   1, Assumptions:
     a.  Steady State, Completely Mixed Lake
     b.  Total Phosphorus: Measure of Trophic Status
   2. Allow. TP Load = (0.01)*(10+H/det t)
 C.  Regression Models
 D. Dynamic Interactive Models:  All Waters
   1. Di Toro (1970)
     a,  San Joaquin River:  Effect of Nutrient Loads & flow Diversions on Sacramento-San
        Joaquin Delta
    - Single  Volume,  Time Variable, CSMP/1130
 E.  1970 - 1980 Rapid Expansion:  Spatial Detail, State Variables
   1. Great Lakes:  U.S. & Canadian Phosphorus Agreement;  Lake Ontario, Lake Huron,
      Saginaw Bay
   2. Lake Erie:  First Inclusion of Sediment Model for Hypolimnetic DO
   3. Coastal Waters:  Delta, Potomac Estuary

IV.  The "Dry Years"
  A.  1980-1990
    I. A General  Hiatus in National Focus on Eutrophication
     a.  National Eutrophication Program ends
     b.  "The Problem's over."  Phosphorus controls in place
     c.  Toxics, Acid Rain
  B. Exceptions:  Algal bloom in Potomac; Low DO in Chesapeake & LI Sound
  B.  1985 -  1990 Renewal Begins
    I. Focus on Coastal Waters, National Estuary Program

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop —————•—	•	—		 Proceedings

    2.  Nitrogen Reductions: Significant Cost
    3,  Questions More Complex:  Point vs. Non-Point Control

 V.  Results
  A,  Predictive Models are Robust: They travel well from water body to water body
  B.  Some Post Auditing:  Predictions  Generally Successful
  C.  Some "Failures": Potomac Estuary 198 3 bloom (sediment phosphorus release);
      Sacramento  San Joaquin  1977 "non-bloom" (benthic filter feeders)

 VI.  So what?
  A.  Has productive management been productive?

 VII.  YES:  An Effective Nutrient Management Program Needs:
  A.  Credible framework for quantitative decision making.
    1. What level of improvement to expect
   2. When will level be achieved
   3. Cost/Benefit analysis if possible
  B. Support of
    1. Nutrient Dischargers
   2. Scientific Community
   3. General Public
  C. Framework for Quantitative Understanding of Nutrient Response
    1.  Reduce Surprises
   2.  Understand surprises that do occur

VIII. Conclusions
  A. We benefit now from 70 years of  observation, prediction, and successful management -
       Can't stop now.
  B.  Essential that quantitative predictive frameworks be incorporated in nutrient management
      programs.

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—	——— Proceedings

Mimi Dannet, U.S. EPA, Office of Wetlands, Oceans, and  Watersheds

I.  Is there a need for nutrient management?
 A.   1994 305 (b) Report to Congress
   1. Third leading cause of impairments to rivers and streams
   2. Top cause of impairment for lakes
   3. Top cause of impairments for estuaries
 B.  303(d) Lists
   I. Among the top three  causes of impairments for listed waters

II.  How does nutrient management mesh with current initiatives?
 A.  Watershed Protection Approach
 B.  Community-based Environmental Protection
 C.  Trading

III.  Endpoints and Assessment Methodologies
 A.  How can the endpoint be tied back to exisiting State water quality standards?
 B.  How responsive is the endpoint to improved nutrient control?
 C. Can the endpoint response be predicted?
 D.  Is the endpoint appropriate for volunteer monitoring?

IV.  Models
 A.  Focus on a core set of models for "routine" applications
 B.  Avoid developing new models  if possible
   1. Enhance existing models
     a.  Enhancement can mean simplification
     b.  Need improved periphyton and macrophyte capabilities
 C.  When evaluating a model, consider:
   I, Number of input parameters
   2. How input parameters are determined
   3. Comparability of model compexity with probable controls
   4. Cost of model application vs. cost of controls
 D.  Watch out for "Home  Improvement" Syndrome
   I. Keep the focus on the resource, not the tool

V.  Models - General Needs
 A.  Training and Technical Support
 B.  Guidance Needs
   \. Model-specific guidance
     a.  Input parameter determination
      -  Monitoring  design  for measured parameters
      -  Estimation techniques for other inputs
     b.  Input parameter estimation for projection models
   2, Case studies

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—		 p    ,.

 Steve Heiskary,  Minnesota Pollution Control Agency

 I.  Minnesota's  Approach to Lake Water Quality Criteria Development
  A.  Steve Heiskary, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency

 II. Northern Lakes and Forests
  A.  Land Use - Forest Dominant
    1.  Forest              75%
    2.  Water and March     11%
    3.  Pasture and Open       7%
    4.  Cultivated            5%
    5.  Urban                2%
  B.  Soils - Sand and Silt
  C.  Lakes - 5,500 Over 10 Acres  (46%)
    1. Maximum Depth Typically 20-55  Feet
    2. Surface Area Typically  100-550 Acres

 III. North-Central Hardwood Forests
  A.  Land Use - No Single Dominant Type
    1.  Forest               16%
    2.  Water and March       8%
    3.  Pasture and Open     20%
    4,  Cultivated           50%
    5.  Urban                 5%
  B. Soils - Sand and Silt
  C. Lakes - 4,765 Over 10 Acres (40%)
    1.  Maximum Depth Typically 20-55 Feet
    2,  Surface Area Typically  150-650 Acres

 IV. Western Corn Belt  Plains
  A. Land Use -  Agriculture Dominant
    I.  Forest                3%
   2.  Water and March      2%
   3.  Pasture and Open     10%
   4.  Cultivated            83%
   5.  Urban                 2%
  B. Soils - Silt
  C. Lakes - 577 Over 10 Acres  (5%)
    1.  Maximum  Depth Typically 7-16 Feet
   2.  Surface Area Typically 350-850 Acres

V.  Northern Glaciated Plains
  A. Land Use -  Agriculture Dominant
   1.  Forest               <1%
   2.  Water and  March      3%
   3.  Pasture and Open      11%
   4,  Cultivated            84%

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop
Proceedings
   5.  Urban                  1%
  B.  Soils - Silt
  C.  Lakes - 855 Over 10 Acres (7%)
   I.  Maximum Depth Typically 7-13 Feet
   2.  Surface  Area Typically 350-850 Acres

VI. Phosphorus Criteria for Minnesota Lakes - Factors Considered
  A.  Impacts on Lake Condition
   1.  Chlorophyll-a
   2.  Transparency
   3.  Hypolimnetic Dissolved Oxygen
  B.  Impacts on Lake Uses
   \,  Aesthetics
   2.  Recreation
   3.  Fisheries (Most Sensitive Uses)
  C.  Regional  Factors

VII. Most Sensitive Lake Uses by Ecoregion and Corresponding Phosphorus Criteria
ECOREGION
Northern Lakes and Forests
North-Central Hardwood
Forests
Western Corn Belt Plains
Northern Glaciated Plains
MOST SENSITIVE USES
Drinking Water Supply
Cold Water Fishery
Primary Contact Recreation and
Aesthetics (Full Support)
Drinking Water Supply
Primary Contact Recreation and
Aesthetics (Full Support)
Drinking Water Supply
Primary Contact Recreation and
Aesthetics (Full Support)
(Partial Support)
Primary Contact Recreation and
Aesthetics (Partial Support)
P CRITERIA
(Mg/l)
15
15
30
30
40
40
40
90
90
 VIII.  Western Corn Belt and Northern Glaciated Plains
  A.  Management Considerations
    1.  Maintain Current Tropic Status
    2.  Focus on Lakes <90 ppi: 1' (25th Percentile)

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	

    3.  Realistic Goals Needed for Restoration
   B,  Phosphorus Goals
    I.  Swimmabie - Full Support:  <40 ppb
                   - Partial Support:  <90 ppb
  r  D(KufP Frequency of Severe Nuisance Blooms , 25% of Summer)
  C.  Problems
    1.  Shallow Lakes
    2.  High  Percent Agricultural Land Use -»High P Export
    3.  Limited Flushing (High Evaporation)

IX. Uses and Application of Criteria
  A.  Prioritizing and Selecting Projects
  B.  Developing Water  Quality Management Plans
  C.  Educating (Goal Setting)
  D.  Guide Enforcement Decisions
  E. Guide Interpretations of Nondegradation

X.  Approaches for Standards Criteria Development
                                                            Proceedings
 State/Entity
 British Columbia


 ME
 OR
 NC
VA
TVA
IJC
                 Approach
                      User Survey - Trophic Characterization & User
                      Perception
                      Ecoregion - Reference Lakes, User Perception,
                      Most Sensitive Uses
Water Use - Trophic Characterization & Fish
Requirements
	•	•——		
Nondegradation - Determine Acceptable
Increase in P, Categorize for Protection
                     Nuisance Phytopiankton - Characterization
                     Average Chl-a. Considers Thermal Stratification
                     Nutrient Sensitive - Chl-a Criteria for Warm
                     and Cold Water Fisheries, Exceedance Leads to
                     Study
                     Nutrient-Enriched - Designation Considers chl-
                     a, DO Fluctuation, and TP
                     Biological - Index of Biotic Integrity to ID
                     Communities Out of BaIance~»Management
                     Priority
                     -.ake-Specific  Detailed Analysis of Biota,
                     "hemicai and Loading->Loading Goals,
                     Jasinwide Phus

-------
National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	                 ~                      Proceedings

XI.  Conclusions                                                              .
  A.  Eutrophication Standards Should Be Developed to Protect Lakes and Reservoirs From
      the Negative Impacts of Cultural Eutrophication.
  B.  Because Federal Criteria or Guidance is Lacking, State EutrophicationControl Programs
      May Continue to Be Discreationary in Their Approach.
  C.  Eutrophication Standards Should Be Developed by the States and Should Be Tailored
      to Local/Regional Conditions and User Expectations.
  D   Lake Monitoring is an Essential Part of Eutrophication Standards Application.
  E   Eutrophication Criteria and Standards Can Serve a Vareity of Purposes.  Primary
      Purpose Is to Assist Lake Managers in the Protection and Improvement of Lake Water
      Quality.

-------
 National Nutrient Assessment Workshop	—		Proceedings

            Summary of Overheads  Used During Workshop Wrap-up

 Day Three Plenary Session Discussion Questions
 •  Taking into account work that has already been completed in the area of nutrient
   enrichment assessment,  what are the priority nutrient assessment tools EPA should
   high-light within its national strategy for development, validation,  and implementation?
 •  Of these  high priority nutrient assessment tools, which ones have the added benefit of
   being applicable across  waterbodies and/or different geographical areas?
 •  What should be the relative timing for  development, validation, and field testing these
   high-priority  assessment tools?
 •  What organizations-state, federal, local, consulting, academic,  nonprofit, etc.--and which
   key individuals should be involved in the development, validation, and implementation of
   these  high-priority assessment tools?
 •  What opportunities  are there to leverage ongoing or planned  work in the short (1-3  years)
   and long  (3-10 years) timeframes?
 •  What national and regional programmatic shifts should be encouraged and fostered?
 •  How feasible are these recommendations taking into consideration the realities of resources
   and capabilities?
 •  How do we keep the momentum for getting nutrient enrichment assessment back on the
   national,  regional, state,  and local watershed management agendas? What existing
   networks  should we tap  into to get the word out and leverage the necessary resources  (both
   people and dollars)?

 National Nutrient Assessment Strategy:   Next Steps
 *  Preliminary draft strategy (based  on the workshop) and draft  workshop proceedings
   distributed to workshop  participants with a request for review (December)
 •  Revised versions of the  issue papers distributed to relevant  breakout group members with
   request for review (January)
 •  Final workshop proceedings summary published (end of January)
 *  Final issue papers published (end of February)
 *  Draft strategy ready for  presentation to  senior EPA managers (February)
 •  Presentation of draft strategy to EPA Program Offices, EPA Regional Offices, ORD
   Laboratories,  federal agencies,  states, professional societies  (February - May)
 •  Draft final strategy for Science Advisory Board review (May)
•  Science Advisory Board  review (Summer 1996)
•  Publication of subsets of the issue papers in peer reviewed  literature (Fall 1996)
•  Final EPA Strategy (Fall 1996)
•  Continued work with other federal agencies, states, professional societies on a more
   encompassing strategy—similar substance, more definitive commitments to  take
   responsibility  for specific actions, policy changes, resource  allocations, etc.  (Summer/Fall
   1996)

-------

-------
     National Nutrient Assessment Strategy:  An Overview of
                 Available Endpoints and  Assessment Tools
Introduction

      Nutrient overenrichment continues to be one of the leading causes of water quality
      impairment in the United States.  The National Water Quality Inventory 1994
      Report to Congress cites nutrients (nitrogen and phosphorus) as one of the leading
      causes of water quality impairment in our nation's rivers, lakes, and estuaries.
      Although nutrients are essential to the health of aquatic ecosystems, excessive
      nutrient loadings can result in the growth of aquatic weeds and algae, leading to
      oxygen  depletion, increased fish and rnacroinvertebrate mortality, and other water
      quality and habitat impairments.

      Over the years, the Environmental Protection Agency's Office of Water has issued
      a number of technical guidance documents  and supported the development of water
      quality simulation models and load estimating models to assess the  impacts of
      urban, rural, and mixed land use activities on receiving waters.  In addition, some
      states currently have water quality standards that incorporate criteria, primarily
      narrative, aimed at controlling problems associated with overenrichment.  However,
      for state and local agencies to better understand and manage nutrient impacts  to
      surface waters, additional work is required.

      EPA established a Nutrient Task Force in July  1993 to gather existing data on
      nutrient  problems and currently available tools.  The Task Force recommended that
      EPA provide additional assistance to states  in developing and implementing
      appropriate nutrient endpoints, assessment methodologies, and models.  The first
      step in carrying out the  recommendations of the Task Force was a nutrient
      assessment workshop, which was held in Washington, D.C., on  December  4-6,
      1995. The workshop was organized around discussions on four major waterbody
      types: estuarine and coastal waters; lakes, impoundments/reservoirs, and ponds;
      rivers and streams; and wetlands.  Working  papers describing the state of the
      science,  gaps, and user needs in terms of nutrient assessment tools and
      methodologies  for each waterbody type were developed and used as foundations
      for group discussion.

      These issue papers have since been revised  and condensed into this one document
      by incorporating the discussions that were held at the workshop and reviewing
      additional literature suggested by workshop  participants.  This condensed paper is
      intended to represent a brief yet comprehensive overview of the nutrient
      overenrichment endpoints, assessment  methodologies, and modeling  tools that  have
      been  or could be used in assessing nutrient overenrichment. It should be viewed
                                                                   Introduction

-------
       as a working document that provides an initial synthesis of the available literature,
       not as an attempt to address all of the detailed issues associated with managing
       nutrient overenrichment.

       This introductory section includes  a discussion of issues that overlap across the
       four waterbody types.  These overlapping issues include defining the term
       endpoint, outlining characteristics of effective endpoints, and reviewing simulation
       loading models that can be applied across multiple types of waterbodies.  The
       following papers then address specific endpoints and models that can be used for
       each of the four waterbody types.
Defining Endpoints

       Key to the development of a national nutrient assessment strategy will be
       identifying endpoints that can be used at an ecosystem or regional level to describe
       nutrient enrichment conditions.  In the context of this paper, the term endpoint is
       used broadly to encompass any type of target set for nutrient protection. As a
       simple example, Minnesota has adopted a phosphorus endpoint of 30 ug/L for
       drinking water supply lakes in its North Central Hardwood  Forests ecoregion.  The
       endpoint 30  ug/L therefore separates an "impacted" lake from a "nonimpacted"
       lake.  Because natural conditions, like trophic state, actually represent a continuum
       of conditions, endpoints are only artificially exacting.  Yet they serve a necessary
       role in management activities because crossing an endpoint  typically yields
       consequences.  Once endpoints  have been established, actual or predicted
       measurements can  be compared to them and conclusions drawn about the status of
       nutrient enrichment.

       Although water quality endpoints  are similar, they are not the same as water
       quality standards, and the two terms should not be confused.  Water quality
       standards consist of a designated use for a waterbody (such  as  for swimming,
       fishing, or protection of aquatic life), as well as either numeric or narrative criteria
       to protect that use (e.g., a minimum dissolved oxygen concentration of 5 mg/L)
       (USEPA, 1994).  Similarly, nutrient endpoints are used  to determine whether a
       waterbody has become eutrophied to the point that certain uses are impaired.  The
       key distinction is that water quality standards have a legal and regulatory
       connotation because of their inclusion  in state or federal regulations, whereas
       endpoints do not necessarily have a regulatory connotation.

       Using Endpoints

       The selection of universal nutrient endpoints is complicated  by the fact that given
       nutrient concentrations  can cause different effects in  different aquatic systems
       (Ingman, 1992).  Many states approach this problem by using narrative criteria to

   An Overview of" Available  Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 address the effects of overenrichment (e.g., nutrients should be kept at
 concentrations that prevent nuisance growths of aquatic plants).  A primary
 advantage of having quantitative nutrient overenrichment endpoints in place would
 be that violations would prompt and focus management action and remedies could
 be instituted when available (NALMS, 1992). Quantitative endpoints would allow
 water resource managers to determine the status of their waterbody and would also
 provide the justification for taking steps toward improving the resource.   For
 example, if a certain river segment were  violating a soluble reactive phosphorus
 endpoint of 6 ug/L, the regulatory agency would be obligated to initiate some type
 of management action. This could be as simple as checking to make sure the local
 wastewater treatment plant is in compliance  with its permit or it could be as far-
 reaching as developing a total  maximum  daily load (TMDL) that targets point and
 nonpoint source phosphorus controls.

 Given the wide variability in the types of waterbodies that can be affected by
 nutrient overenrichment, in addition to the climatological differences that  might
 affect waters in different areas, it is generally accepted that endpoints should be
 regional in  nature as opposed to nationwide (Heiskary and Wilson, 1989;  NALMS,
 1992; Porcella,  1989).  This reflects the fact  that some waters will not be able to
 reach the same level of quality as others and also acknowledges that different parts
 of the country have different uses.  In some cases, nutrient endpoints  might even
 need to be site-specific or developed within the context of a total maximum daily
 load. In general, a balance should be struck  between choosing endpoints that
 reflect specific ecoregion conditions and choosing those which allow practical
 implementation.

 Endpoints can also be used to identify incremental changes as a waterbody moves
 toward eutrophication-related degradation, thus affording water quality managers
 the opportunity to take actions  that might prevent a system from degrading to a
 point where beneficial uses are affected.   An  example of this would be a nutrient
 concentration endpoint that signals that a  lake is approaching the point where
 plankton blooms and surface scums have historically been a problem.  This "early
 warning"  function can be especially beneficial in high-profile, nondegraded
 systems where the costs of nutrient overenrichment might be especially high.

 Quantitative endpoints can be used as indices to determine waterbody status at a
 point in time, as well as status  over a number of years.  This use may be important
 in biennial Clean Water Act section 305(b) reporting, in identifying which lakes,
 rivers, estuaries, and other waterbodies should be prioritized for restoration, and in
evaluating the success of existing programs and watershed management plans.

Endpoints can provide focus for watershed management activities and can  serve an
important role in communicating waterbody goals to  the public.  A Secchi depth
endpoint of 3 feet, for example, directly reflects something that is valued by the
public and is more easily understood than a goal of having "no undesirable or

                                                               Introduction     3

-------
   nuisance aquatic life."  Since waterbody users will often be called on to voluntarily
   alter their actions in an attempt to improve the resource, it is important that they
   understand and support the reasons for doing so.  Endpoints can play a key role in
   this capacity.  Additionally, endpoints can play a role in communicating to the
   public what level of quality can  be reasonably expected of a resource given
   background conditions (Heiskary,  1989).

   Characteristics of  Effective Endpoints

   Effective nutrient overenrichment endpoints should accurately reflect the water
   quality that is desired in the waterbody. They should be directly related to the
   designated beneficial uses of the water and should be strict enough to keep a
   comfortable margin of safety between actual conditions and conditions that have
   been determined to impair use (whether those  uses are swimming, boating, fishing,
   drinking water supply, or others) (NALMS, 1992).  Borrowing from concepts
   applied in lakes and reservoirs, a number of authors have suggested that impaired
   use conditions can be estimated by surveying users to determine at what levels
   they feel their enjoyment of a waterbody is diminished (Heiskary and Wilson,
   1989; Heiskary,  1989;  Smeltzer and Heiskary, 1990).  Survey results can be
   correlated with simultaneous water quality measurements to establish endpoints at
   the border between acceptable and unacceptable conditions.  If 90 percent of those
   surveyed agree that their aesthetic enjoyment of a lake is impaired at chlorophyll a
   concentrations exceeding 30 ug/L, this value represents a possible biomass
   endpoint. The survey  approach recognizes that the overall water quality of a
   waterbody is highly  subjective and is best determined by the  end user.

   Nutrient enrichment endpoints should also be linked in some manner to potential
   management options.  In other words, endpoints should provide managers  with
   some understanding  of the nutrient load reductions that will be necessary to correct
   violations. Most likely this will involve the use of water quality models that can
   predict water quality parameters  based on existing and potential  nutrient loads, as
   well as other model  inputs  (such as streamflow,  residence time, and temperature).

   A final consideration in selecting endpoints is the cost associated with monitoring.
   Water quality parameters that can  be measured easily and accurately will obviously
   be superior to those  which  require more time and resources to obtain.  Issues to
   keep in mind in this regard include how often the measurements must be taken,
   who (e.g., experts vs. volunteers) can take the measurements, and the cost of
   monitoring equipment  and laboratory analysis.
An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Watershed Loading  Models

       Simulation models have been and will continue to be integral components of water
       quality planning and pollution control activities, including evaluating the degree of
       nutrient overenrichment.  They serve an essential role in assessing and predicting
       nutrient overenrichment effects and in evaluating management alternatives.  Model
       selection criteria should include factors such as prediction uncertainty, cost of
       calibration and testing, meaningful endpoints, appropriate spatial and temporal
       detail, and simplicity  in application  and understanding.

       Most simulation models can be classified according to whether they  focus on
       pollutant export (loading models) or waterbody response (receiving water models).
       Because the focus  of loading models is on the surrounding watershed and not the
       waterbody itself, these types of models can be applied to estimate  loadings to
       multiple types of waterbodies  A summary of loadings models is therefore
      presented  here, while  a discussion of receiving water models specific to the  various
      waterbody types is included in the individual waterbody sections.  Information on
      these models has been summarized from the revised Compendium of Tools for
      Watershed Assessment and  TMDL Development (USEPA, in review).

      Loading models are used to predict key factors such as flow, nutrient type,
      concentration, and  load delivered to  the selected receiving waterbody. Models
      vary in their capabilities to  simulate these processes.  For discussion  purposes,
      loading models are divided  into categories based on their complexity, operation,
      time step,  and simulation technique.  They  can be grouped into three
      categories—simple methods, mid-range models, and detailed models  (USEPA,
      1992). The three categories of models and types of available models in each
      category are discussed below.

      Simple Loading Methods

      The major advantage of simple methods is that they can provide a rapid means of
      identifying critical loading areas with minimal effort and data requirements.
      Simple methods are compilations of expert judgment and empirical relationships
      between physiographic characteristics of the watershed and pollutant export.  They
      can often be applied by using a spreadsheet program or hand-held calculator.
      Simple methods are often used when data limitations and budget and  time
      constraints preclude the use  of complex models.  They are used to diagnose
      nonpoint source pollution problems where limited information is available. Default
      values provided for these methods are derived from empirical relationships that are
      evaluated based on  regional  or site-specific  data.

      Simple methods provide only rough estimates of sediment and pollutant loadings
      and have very limited predictive capability.   The empiricism  contained in  the


                                                        Watershed Loading Models    5

-------
   models  limits their transferability to regions other than those for which they were
   developed.  Because they often neglect seasonal variability, simple methods might
   not be adequate to model water quality problems for which loadings of shorter
   duration are important.  They might be sufficient for modeling nutrient loadings to
   and eutrophication of long-residence-time waterbodies (e.g., lakes, reservoirs).
   Summaries of the simple methods' capabilities, model components, and input and
   output data are provided below.

   EPA  Screening Procedures.  The EPA Screening Procedures, developed by the
   EPA  Environmental Research Laboratory in Athens, Georgia, (McElroy et al.,
   1976; Mills, 1985) include methodologies to calculate  nutrient loads from point
   and nonpoint sources, including atmospheric deposition,  for preliminary assessment
   of water quality.  The procedures consist of loading functions and simple empirical
   expressions  relating nonpoint pollutant loads to other readily available parameters.
   Data  required generally include information on land use/land cover, management
   practices,  soils, and topography.  An advantage of this approach is the possibility
   of using readily available data as default values when site-specific information is
   lacking.  Application of these procedures requires minimum personnel training and
   practically no calibration.  However, application to large complex watersheds
   should be limited to preplanning activities.

   The Simple Method.  The Simple Method is an empirical approach developed for
   estimating pollutant export from urban development sites in the Washington, D.C.,
   area (Schueler, 1987).  It is used at the site-planning level to predict pollutant
   loadings under a variety of development scenarios.  Its application is  limited to
   small drainage  areas of less than a square mile. Pollutant concentrations of
   phosphorus, nitrogen, chemical oxygen demand,  biological oxygen demand
   (BOD), and metals are calculated from flow-weighted  concentration values for new
   suburban  areas, older urban areas, central business districts, hardwood forests, and
   urban highways.  The method relies on the National Urban Runoff Program
   (NURP) data for default values (USEPA, 1983).   A graphical relationship is used
   to determine the event mean sediment concentration based on readily available
   information. This method is not coded into a computer program but can be easily
   implemented with a hand-held calculator.

   USGS Regression Approach.  The regression approach developed by USGS
   researchers is based on a statistical description of historic records of storm runoff
   responses on a watershed level (Tasker and Driver, 1988). This method may be
   used  for rough preliminary calculations of annual pollutant loads when data and
   time  are limiting.  Input data include drainage area, percent imperviousness, mean
   annual rainfall, general land use pattern, and mean minimum monthly temperature.
   Application of this method provides storm-mean pollutant loads and corresponding
   confidence intervals.  The use of this method as a planning tool at a regional or
   watershed level might require preliminary  calibration and verification with
   additional, more recent monitoring data.

An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Simplified Pollutant Yield Approach (SLOSS-PHOSPH). This method uses two
 simplified loading algorithms to evaluate soil erosion, sedimentation, and
 phosphorus transport from distributed watershed areas. The SLOSS algorithm
 provides estimates of sediment yield, whereas the PHOSPH algorithm uses a
 loading function to evaluate the amount of sediment-bound phosphorus.
 Application to watershed and subwatershed levels was developed by Tim et al.
 (1991) based  on an integrated approach coupling these algorithms with the Virginia
 Geographical  Information System (VirGIS). The approach was applied to the
 Nomini Creek Watershed, Westmoreland County, Virginia, to target critical areas
 of nonpoint source pollution at the subwatershed level (USEPA,  1992c).   In this
 application, analysis was limited to phosphorus loading; however, other pollutants
 for which input data or default values are available can be modeled in a  similar
 fashion.  The  approach  requires full-scale GIS capability and trained personnel.

 Watershed.  Watershed is a spreadsheet model developed at the University  of
 Wisconsin to calculate phosphorus loading  from point sources, combined sewer
 overflows (CSOs), septic tanks, rural croplands, and other urban and rural sources.
 The Watershed program can be used to evaluate the trade-offs  between control of
 point and nonpoint sources (Walker et al, 1989). It uses an annual time  step to
 calculate total nutrient loads and to evaluate the cost-effectiveness of pollution
 control practices in term of cost per unit load reduction. The program uses a
 series of worksheets to summarize watershed characteristics and to estimate
 pollutant loadings for uncontrolled and controlled conditions.  Because of the
 simple formulation describing the various pollutant loading processes, the model
 can be applied using available default values with minimum calibration effort.

 The Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Model.  The FHWA's  Office of
 Engineering and Highway Operations has developed a simple statistical spreadsheet
 procedure to estimate pollutant loading (including nutrients) and impacts  to streams
 and lakes that  receive highway stormwater runoff (Federal Highway
 Administration,  1990).  The procedure uses  several worksheets  to tabulate site
 characteristics  and other input  parameters, as well as to calculate runoff volumes,
 pollutant loads, and the magnitude and frequency of occurrence of instream
 pollutant concentrations.  The FHWA model uses a set of default values for
 pollutant event-mean concentrations that depend on traffic volume and  the rural or
 urban setting of the highway's pathway.  The Federal Highway Administration
 uses this method to identify and quantify the constituents of highway runoff and
 their potential  effects on receiving waters and  to identify areas that might require
 controls.

 Watershed Management Model (WMM).  The Watershed Management Model
 was developed for the Florida Department of Environmental Regulation for
watershed management planning and estimation of watershed pollutant  loads
(Camp,  Dresser, and McKee,  1992). Nitrogen and phosphorus from point and
nonpoint sources can be estimated.  The  model is implemented  in the Lotus  1-2-3

                                                   Watershed Loading Models    7

-------
   spreadsheet environment and can thus calculate standard statistics and produce
   plots and bar charts of results. The model includes computational components for
   stream and lake water quality analysis using simple transport and transformation
   formulations based on travel time. The WMM has been applied to several
   watershed management projects  including the development of a master plan for
   Jacksonville,  Florida, and the Part II estimation of watershed loadings for the
   NPDES permitting process.  It has also been applied in Norfolk County, Virginia;
   to a Watershed Management Plan for North Carolina; to a wasteload allocation
   study for Lake Tohopekaliga, near Orlando, Florida; and for water quality planning
   in Austin, Texas (Pantalion et al., 1995).

   Mid-range Loading Models

   Mid-range  models attempt a compromise between the empiricism of the simple
   methods and  the complexity of detailed mechanistic models. The advantage of
   mid-range watershed-scale models  is that they evaluate nutrient sources and
   impacts over broad geographic scales and therefore can assist in defining target
   areas for mitigation programs on a watershed basis.  Several mid-range models  are
   designed to interface with geographic information systems, which greatly facilitate
   parameter estimation (e.g., AGNPS). Greater reliance on site-specific data gives
   mid-range models a relatively broad range of regional applicability.  However, the
   use of simplifying assumptions can limit the accuracy of their predictions to within
   about an order of magnitude (Dillaha, 1992) and can restrict their analysis to
   relative comparisons.

   Unlike the simple methods, which  are restricted to predictions of annual or storm
   loads, mid-range tools can be used to assess the seasonal or  inter-annual variability
   of nonpoint source pollutant loadings and to assess long-term water quality trends.
   Also, they  can be used to address land use patterns and landscape configurations in
   actual watersheds. In addition, they typically require some site-specific data and
   calibration.  Some mid-range models simplify  the description of transport processes
   while emphasizing possible reductions available with controls; others simplify the
   description of control options and emphasize changes in concentrations as
   pollutants move through the watershed.

   It should be noted that neither the  simple nor the  mid-range  models consider
   degradation and transformation processes, and few incorporate adequate
   representation of pollutant transport within and from the watershed.  Although their
   applications might be limited to relative comparisons, however, they can often
   provide water quality managers  with useful information for watershed-scale
   planning level decisions.

   Stormwater Intercept and Treatment Evaluation Model for Analysis and
   Planning (SITEMAP).  SITEMAP, previously distributed under the name
   NPSMAP, is a dynamic simulation program that predicts daily  runoff, nutrient

An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  loadings, infiltration, soil moisture, evapotranspiration, and drainage to
  groundwater.  (Omicron Associates, 1990). The model can be used to evaluate
  user-specified alternative control strategies, and it simulates stream segment load
  capacities (LCs) in an attempt to develop point source  wasteload allocations
  (WLAs) and nonpoint source load allocations (LAs). Probability distributions  for
  runoff and nutrient loadings can be calculated  by the model based on either single-
  event or continuous simulations. The model can be applied in urban, agricultural
  or complex  watershed simulations.  Although this model requires a minimum
  calibration effort, it requires moderate effort to prepare input data  files. The
  current  version of  the program considers only nutrient loading; sediment and other
  pollutants are not yet incorporated  into the program. The model is easily interfaced
  with GIS (ARC/INFO) to facilitate preparation of land  use files. Two examples of
  where SITEMAP has been applied as a component of a full watershed model  are
 the Tualatin River  basin for the Oregon Department of Environmental Quality, and
 the Fairview Creek watershed for the Metropolitan  Service District in Portland,
 Oregon.

 Generalized Watershed Loading Functions (GWLF) Model.  The GWLF model
 was developed at Cornell University to assess the point and nonpoint loadings of
 nitrogen and phosphorus from urban and agricultural watersheds, including septic
 systems,  and to evaluate the effectiveness of certain land use management practices
 (Haith et al., 1992).  One advantage of this model is that it was written with the
 express purpose of requiring  no calibration, making extensive use of default
 parameters.  The GWLF model  includes rainfall/runoff and erosion and sediment
 generation components, as well as total  and dissolved nitrogen and phosphorus
 loadings. The GWLF model uses daily time  steps and allows analysis of annual
 and seasonal time series.  The model also uses  simple transport routing, based  on
 the delivery  ratio concept.  In addition, simulation results can be used to identify
 and rank  pollution sources and evaluate basinwide management programs and land
 use changes. The most recent update of the model  incorporates a septic (on-site
 wastewater disposal) system component.  The model also includes several reporting
 and graphical representations of simulation output to aid in  interpretation of the
 results.  This model was successfully  tested on a medium-size watershed in New
 York (Haith  and Shoemaker,  1987).  A version  of the model with an  enhanced user
 interface and linkages to national databases, WSM (Watershed  Screening Model),
 has recently become available and is distributed with EPA-OWOW's Watershed
 Screening and Targeting Tool (WSTT).

 Urban Catchment  Model (P8-UCM). The P8-UCM program was developed  for
 the Narragansett Bay Project to simulate the generation and transport  of stormwater
 runoff pollutants in  small urban catchments and to assess impacts of development
on water quality,  with minimum site-specific data.  It includes several routines  for
evaluating the expected removal  efficiency for particular site plans,  selecting or
siting best management practices (BMPs) necessary  to achieve a specified level of
pollutant removal, and comparing the relative changes in pollutant loads as a

                                                    Watershed Loading Models    9

-------
          watershed develops (Palmstrom and Walker,  1990).  Default input parameters can
          be derived from NURP data and are available as a function of land use, land
          cover, and soil properties. However, without calibration, the use of model results
          should be limited to relative comparisons.  Spreadsheet-like menus and on-line
          help documentation make extensive user interface possible.  On-screen  graphical
          representations of output are developed for a better interpretation of simulation
          results.  The model also includes components for performing monthly or
          cumulative frequency distributions for flows and pollutant loadings.

          Automated Q-ILLUDAS (AUTO-QI).  AUTO-QI is a watershed model
          developed by the Illinois State Water Survey to perform continuous simulations of
          stormwater runoff from pervious and  impervious urban lands (Terstriep et al.,
          1990).  It also allows the examination of storm events or storm sequence impacts
          on receiving water.  Critical events are also identified by the model.  However,
          hourly weather input data are  required. Several pollutants, including nutrients,
          chemical oxygen demand, metals, and bacteria, can be analyzed simultaneously.
          This model also includes a component to evaluate the relative effectiveness of best
          management practices.  An  updated version of AUTO-QI, with an improved user
          interface and  linkage to a geographic  information system (ARC/INFO on PRIME
          computer), has been completed by the Illinois State Water Survey.  This interface
          is provided to generate  the necessary  input files related to land use, soils, and
          control measures. AUTO-QI was verified on the Boneyard Creek in Champaign,
          Illinois,  and applied to the Calumet and Little Rivers to determine annual pollutant
          loadings.

          Agricultural  Nonpoint Source Pollution Model (AGNPS).  Developed by the
          U.S. Department of Agriculture's (USDA)  Agricultural Research Service, AGNPS
          addresses concerns related to the potential impacts of point and nonpoint source
          pollution on water quality (Young et al., 1989).  It was designed to quantitatively
          estimate pollution loads from  agricultural watersheds and to assess the relative
          effects of alternative management programs. The  model simulates surface water
          runoff, as well as nutrient and sediment constituents associated with agricultural
          nonpoint sources and point  sources.  It also accounts for point sources like
          treatment plants, and stream bank or gully  erosion. The  available version of
          AGNPS is event-based; however, a continuous version is under development
          (Needham and Young,  1993).  The AGNPS grid system allows the model to be
          connected to  other software such as geographic information systems (GIS) and
          digital elevation models (DEM).  This connectivity can facilitate the development
          of a number of the model's input parameters.  Two new terrain-enhanced versions
          of the model— AGNPS-C,  a contour-based version, and AGNPS-G, a grid-based
          version—have been developed to generate  the grid network and the required
          topographic parameters (Panuska et al., 1991). Vieux and  Needham  (1993) describe
          a GIS-based analysis of the sensitivity of AGNPS predictions to grid-cell size.
          Engel et al. (1993) present GRASS-based tools to assist with the preparation of
          model inputs  and visualization and analysis of model results. Tim and Jolly (1994)

10     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  used AGNPS with ARC/INFO to evaluate the effectiveness of several alternative
  management strategies in reducing sediment pollution in a 417-ha watershed in
  southern Iowa. The model also includes enhanced graphical representations of
  input and output information.

  Detailed Loading Models

  Detailed models best represent the current understanding of watershed processes
  affecting pollution generation. If properly applied and calibrated, detailed models
  can provide relatively accurate predictions of variable flows and water quality at
  numerous points within a watershed. The additional precision they provide,
  however, comes at the expense of considerable time and resource expenditure.

 Detailed models incorporate  the manner in which watershed processes change over
 time in  a continuous  fashion rather than relying on simplified terms for rates of
 change (Addiscott and Wagenet, 1985).  They tend to require rate parameters for
 flow velocities and nutrient accumulation, settling, and decay instead of capacity
 terms.  The length of time steps is variable and depends on the stability of
 numerical  solutions as well as the response time for the system (Nix,  1991).
 Algorithms in detailed models more closely simulate the physical processes of
 infiltration, runoff, pollutant  accumulation, instream effects, and
 groundwater/surface water interaction. The input and output of detailed models
 also have greater spatial and  temporal resolution.  Moreover, the manner in which
 physical characteristics and processes differ over space is incorporated within the
 governing  equations (Nix, 1991).  Linkage to biological modeling is possible
 because  of the comprehensive nature  of continuous simulation models. In addition,
 detailed  hydrologic simulations can be used to design  potential control actions.

 Detailed models use small time steps  to allow for continuous and storm event
 simulations.  However, input data file preparation and calibration require
 professional training and adequate resources.  Some of these models (e.g.,
 STORM, SWMM, ANSWERS) were  developed not only to support planning-level
 evaluations but also to provide design criteria for pollution control practices.  If
 appropriately applied, state-of-the-art models like HSPF and SWMM can provide
 accurate  estimations of pollutant loads and the expected impacts on water quality.
 New interfaces developed for HSPF and SWMM, and links with  GISs, can
 facilitate the use of complex  models for environmental decision-making. However,
 their added accuracy might not always justify the amount of effort and resources
 they require.  Application  of  such detailed models is more cost-effective when used
 to address complex situations or objectives.

Storage, Treatment, Overflow Runoff Model (STORM).  STORM is a U.S.
Army Corps of Engineers  (COE) model developed for continuous simulation of
runoff quantity and quality, including  sediments and several conservative
pollutants.  STORM has been widely used for planning and evaluation of the trade-

                                                   Watershed Loading Models    11

-------
          off between treatment and storage control options for CSOs and was primarily
          designed for modeling stormwater runoff from urban areas.  It requires relatively
          moderate to high calibration and input data,  STORM was initially developed for
          mainframe  computer usage; however, several versions have been adapted by
          various individual consultants for use on microcomputers. The model has been
          applied recently to water quality planning in  the City of Austin, Texas (Pantalion
          et at., 1995).

          Areal Nonpoint Source Watershed Environment Response Simulation Model
          (ANSWERS). ANSWERS is a comprehensive model developed at the University
          of Georgia  to evaluate the effects of land use, management schemes, and
          conservation practices or structures on the quantity  and quality of water from both
          agricultural and nonagricultural  watersheds (Beasley, 1986). The distributed
          structure of this model allows for a better analysis of the spatial as well as
          temporal variability of pollution sources and  loads.  It was  initially developed on a
          storm event basis to enhance the physical description of erosion and sediment
          transport processes. Data file preparation for the ANSWERS program is  rather
          complex  and requires mainframe capabilities, especially when dealing with large
          watersheds. The output routines are quite flexible; results may be obtained in
          several tabular and graphical forms.  The program has been used to evaluate
          management practices for agricultural watersheds and construction sites in Indiana.
          It has been  combined with extensive monitoring programs to evaluate the relative
          importance  of point and nonpoint source contributions to Saginaw Bay.  This
          application  involved the computation of unit  area loadings under different land use
          scenarios for evaluation of the trade-offs between LAs and  WLAs.  Recent model
          revisions include improvements to the  nutrient transport and transformation
          subroutines (Dillaha et al., 1988). Bouraoui et al. (1993) describe the development
          of a continuous version of the model.

          Multi-event urban runoff quality model (DR3M-QUAL). DR3M is a watershed
          model for routing storm runoff through a branched  system of pipes  and/or natural
          channels using rainfall as input.  The model provides detailed simulation  of storm-
          runoff periods selected by the user and a daily soil-moisture accounting between
          storms.  Kinematic wave theory is used for routing flows over contributing
          overland-flow areas and through the channel  network.  Storm hydrographs may be
          saved for input to DR3M-QUAL, which simulates the quality of surface runoff
          from urban watersheds.  The model simulates impervious areas, pervious  area, and
          precipitation contributions to runoff quality, as well as the effects of street
          sweeping and/or detention storage.  Variations of runoff quality are simulated for
          user-specified storm-runoff periods.  Between these storms, a daily accounting of
          the accumulation and washoff of water-quality constituents on effective impervious
          areas is maintained. Input to the model includes the storm hydrographs, usually
          from DR3M. The program has been extensively reviewed within the USGS and
          applied to several urban modeling studies (Brabets, 1986; Lindner-Lunsford and
          Ellis,  1987; Guay, 1990).

12     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  Simulation for Water Resources in Rural Basins - Water Quality
  (SWRRBWQ). The SWRRBWQ model was adapted from the field-scale
  CREAMS model by USDA to simulate hydrologic, sedimentation, nutrient, and
  pesticide movement in large, complex rural watersheds (Arnold et al.,  1989),
  SWRRBWQ uses a daily time step to evaluate the effect of management decisions
  on water, sediment yields, and pollutant loadings.  The model is useful for
  estimation of the order of magnitude of pollutant loadings from relatively small
  watersheds or watersheds with fairly uniform properties. Input requirements are
  relatively high, and experienced personnel are required for successful simulations
  SWRRBWQ was used by the National  Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
  (NOAA) to evaluate pollutant loadings  to coastal estuaries and embayments as part
  of its national Coastal Pollution Discharge Inventory.  The  model has been run  for
  all major estuaries on the east coast, west coast, and Gulf coast for a wide range of
  pollutants (Donigian and Huber, 1991). Although SWRRBWQ is no longer under
  active development, the technology is being incorporated into the Soil and Water
  Assessment Tool (SWAT) as part  of the Hydrologic Unit Model for the United
 States (HUMUS) project at Temple, Texas (Arnold et al., 1993;  Srinivasan and
 Arnold, 1994). EPA's Office of Science and Technology (OST)  has recently
 developed a Microsoft Windows-based interface for SWRRBWQ to allow
 convenient access to temperature, precipitation, and soil data files.

 Storm Water Management Mode! (SWMM). SWMM is a comprehensive
 watershed-scale model developed by EPA (Huber and Dickinson, 1988).  It was
 initially developed to address urban stormwater and assist in storm-event analysis
 and derivation of design criteria for structural control of urban  stormwater
 pollution, but it was later upgraded to allow continuous simulation and  application
 to complex watersheds and land uses. SWMM can be used to  model several types
 of pollutants provided that input data are available.  Recent versions of  the model
 can be used for either continuous or storm event simulation with user-specified
 variable time steps.  The model is relatively data-intensive and requires  special
 effort for  validation and calibration.  Its  application  in detailed  studies of complex
 watersheds  might require a team effort and highly trained personnel.  In addition to
 developing comprehensive watershed-scale planning, typical uses of SWMM
 include predicting combined sewer overflows, assessing the effectiveness of BMPs,
 providing input to short-time-increment dynamic receiving water  quality models,
 and interpreting receiving water quality monitoring data (Donigian and Huber,
 1991).  EPA's Office of Science and Technology distributes a Microsoft Windows
 interface for SWMM that makes the model more accessible.  A postprocessor
 allows tabular and graphical  display of model results and has a special section to
 help in model calibration.

The Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF).  HSPF  is a
comprehensive package developed by EPA for simulating water quantity and
quality for a wide range of organic  and inorganic pollutants from agricultural
watersheds (Bicknell et al.,  1993).  The model uses continuous simulations of

                                                  Watershed Loading Models    13

-------
          water balance and pollutant generation, transformation, and transport. Time series
          of the runoff flow rate, sediment yield, and user-specified pollutant concentrations
          can be generated  at any point in the watershed.  The model also includes instream
          quality components for nutrient fate and transport, biochemical oxygen demand
          (BOD), dissolved oxygen (DO), pH, phytoplankton, zooplankton, and benthic
          algae.  Statistical  features are incorporated into the model to allow for frequency-
          duration analysis  of specific  output parameters.  Data requirements for HSPF are
          extensive, and calibration and verification are recommended.  The program is
          maintained on IBM microcomputers and DEC/VAX systems.  Because of its
          comprehensive nature, the HSPF model requires highly trained personnel. It is
          recommended that its application to real case studies be carried out as a team
          effort.  The model has been extensively used for both  screening-level and detailed
          analyses.  The Chesapeake Bay Program is using HSPF to model total watershed
          contributions of flow, sediment, nutrients, and associated constituents to the tidal
          region  of the Bay (Donigian et  al., 1990; Donigian and Patwardhan, 1992).  Moore
          et al. (1992) describe an application to model BMP effects on a Tennessee
          watershed. Scheckenberger and Kennedy (1994) discuss how HSPF can  be  used in
          subwatershed planning.  Ball et al. (1993) describe an  application of HSPF in
          Australia.   Lumb  et al.  (1990) describe an  interactive program for data
          management and  analyses that can be  effectively used with HS and Lumb and
          Kittle (1993) present an expert system that can be used for calibration and
          application of HSPF.
14     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Lakes and Reservoirs


       Lakes and reservoirs are among the water resources identified as part of EPA's
       National Nutrient Assessment Strategy. They are especially vulnerable to the
       effects of nutrient overenrichment because of their long residence time.
       Eutrophication in lakes and reservoirs can manifest itself in many ways, including
       as plankton surface scums, excessive macrophyte growths, seasonal blue-green
       algal blooms, and decreased dissolved oxygen concentrations.  Treated drinking
       water taken from eutrophic  lakes and reservoirs can also potentially be
       contaminated with disinfection by-products such as trihalomethanes, posing a threat
       to human health.  Through the biennial National Water Quality Inventory Report to
       Congress, state officials consistently identify nutrients as the cause of more lake
       and reservoir impairments than any other single pollutant (USEPA, 1992, 1994a).

       In some respects, the body of  science regarding the causes and effects of
       eutrophication in lakes and reservoirs is more mature than  it is for other
       waterbodies.  A great deal of research has been conducted in this area dating back
       to the  work of Vollenweider in the mid- to late-1960s, and the linkage between
       nutrient loading and  the eutrophication of lakes and reservoirs has been strongly
      established in the literature (e.g., Vollenweider, 1968; Hutchinson, 1973; Wetzel,
       1983).  Many lake and reservoir  managers have taken advantage of this by
      applying the existing base of knowledge to the management of their individual
      lakes. Nevertheless, there is  no widely accepted approach to managing nutrient
      overenrichment and many communities continue to suffer the ill effects of human-
      induced eutrophication.

      The relationship between nutrient loading and eutrophication is complicated by a
      variety of physical, chemical, and biological factors that make each lake, reservoir,
      and watershed unique.  In some waterbodies, for example, increased sedimentation
      (and corresponding loss of volume) of nutrient-rich soils and partially decomposed
      plant material is an important part of the eutrophication process (Cooke and
      Carlson, 1989).  Internal loading  of nutrients  from the sediment may also drive
      biological production cycles  in many lakes (e.g., Cooke et al., 1993; van der Molen
      and Boers,  1994), and the growth of nuisance vegetation may often be controlled
      by factors such as the amount of  available light, grazing populations, or water
      temperature.  Resource managers must keep all of these factors in mind as they
      attempt to formulate a strategy  to address nutrient overenrichment.

      State of the Science—Endpoints

      A review of the available literature suggests  that a number of water quality
      parameters have been used to characterize the nutrient enrichment of lakes and
      reservoirs.  In some instances these parameters  have been used on a statewide
                                                             Lakes and Reservoirs   15

-------
          basis; in other instances they have been specifically designed for individual lakes.
          Still other parameters have simply been proposed in the literature.

          Carlson (1984) points out the importance of distinguishing between causal factor
          parameters (e.g., phosphorus) and biological response  parameters (e.g., algal
          biomass). Endpoints of both types of factors have been used to evaluate, classify,
          and set  standards for lakes and reservoirs.  Other parameters include hypolimnetic
          oxygen  depletion rate and odor and taste indicators. Presented below  are short
          descriptions of these parameters.

          Causal Factor Parameters

          Total Phosphorus.  Perhaps the most common current nutrient enrichment
          endpoint in lakes and reservoirs is total  phosphorus concentration.  Total
          phosphorus standards have been used to address eutrophication in the  Great Lakes,
          Lake Champlain, Lake Okeechobee,  and a number of  smaller watersheds  (NALMS,
          1992; Smeltzer,  1992; Goldstein and Ritter,  1993; Heiskary and Walker,  1988).
          These standards  are typically based on summer ambient levels and can range
          anywhere from 7 to 200 pg/L (MWCG,  1982).  The use of spring total phosphorus
          has also been shown to be an effective early warning predictor of summer algal
          levels (Jones et al., 1979) and might prove  to be a highly cost-effective endpoint.
          Several  studies have shown it to be an effective  predictor of summer mean and
          summer maximum chlorophyll a in both temperate and subarctic lakes (Ostrofsky
          and Rigler, 1987).

          Phosphorus has been commonly used as an enrichment endpoint because  of its
          direct correlation with the associated negative effects of eutrophication. It is most
          often the limiting nutrient that controls the growth of nuisance algae and
          macrophytes and can therefore be used to predict their growth. Phosphorus is also
          relatively  inexpensive to monitor and is  already incorporated into most monitoring
          programs. Most simulation models incorporate phosphorus concentrations either as
          an input variable or as part of model output.

          One concern with using total phosphorus as an endpoint is that the nutrient itself is
          not what hinders water use (Walker,  1979).  There are those who would argue that
          only use-related  parameters (such as  algal biomass or fish kills) should serve as
          endpoints.  Another concern arises in situations where the limiting  nutrient is
          unclear  or might change by season.  A phosphorus endpoint  in a nitrogen limited
          lake, for instance, would be a misdirected goal.

          Total Nitrogen Concentration. Several states reported using total  nitrogen
          concentration as  a eutrophication-based water quality standard in 1987 (NALMS,
          1988). However, since freshwater systems are more often phosphorus,  rather than
          nitrogen-limited, relatively little attention has been focused on using this parameter
          as a eutrophication endpoint. This is  reflected by that fact that it has not been as

16     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  extensively studied as has phosphorus and by the lack of sophisticated models that
  adequately account for its effect on the eutrophication process. Nitrogen might be
  an appropriate endpoint only for those highly productive lakes and reservoirs that
  are moving toward nitrogen limitation.

  Nkrogen:Phosphorus Ratio. For those lakes and reservoirs which might be
  approaching nitrogen limitation, the nitrogen-to-phosphorus ratio, both of loadings
  and of standing concentrations, can provide important insight regarding which
  nutrient should be controlled.  Nitrogen and phosphorus are taken up by algae in
  an approximately constant ratio of 16 atoms of nitrogen per  1  atom of phosphorus,
  or 7.2:1 by weight.  The practical range around this number is 10-20 (Chiaudani
  and Vighi, 1974;  Boynton et ah, 1995; Thomann and  Mueller, 1987).  Waters with
  relative concentrations, then, of <10:1 nitrogen to phosphorus might have
  insufficient nitrogen  for algal uptake relative to the available phosphorus.  Nitrogen
 availability limits plant growth in  these situations.  When nitrogen:phosphorus is
 >20, the converse may be true: phosphorus becomes the limiting nutrient for plant
 production.  An assessment of potential  limitation at intermediate values is
 problematic.  Complicating factors involve other limitations (e.g., light), the
 presence of nitrogen-fixing algae,  and the availability of the forms of nitrogen and
 phosphorus present.  Bioassays have been used to assess nutrient limitation; for
 fresh waters, a standardized test has been developed.

 Biological Response Parameters

 Although macrophytes play a dominant role  in many lakes and reservoirs, algal
 biomass in the open water is traditionally the parameter used to characterize
 nutrient enrichment.  Due to the difficulty in analyzing biomass, limnologists have
 turned to two popular biomass surrogates, chlorophyll  a concentration and Secchi
 disk depth.

 Chlorophyll a.  Chlorophyll a is the dominant pigment in algal cells and is fairly
 easy to measure. Even though chlorophyll concentration varies  from species to
 species and fluctuates according to light intensity, it still remains a valuable
 surrogate for algal biomass (Carlson, 1980; Watson, et al., 1992).  Several states
 have adopted chlorophyll a concentrations as standards for lake quality. Oregon
 has set an endpoint of 10 ug/L for natural lakes that thermally stratify and 15 ug/L
 for natural  lakes that do not thermally stratify (NALMS, 1992). Similarly, North
Carolina uses a standard of 40 ug/L for warm waters and  15 ug/L for cold waters
(NALMS, 1992).  On the regional  level, Raschke (1994) has proposed  a mean
growing  season  limit of 15 ug/L for water supply impoundments in the
southeastern United States and a value of 25  ug/L for waterbodies primarily used
for other purposes  (e.g., viewing pleasure, safe  swimming, fishing, boating).
                                                        Lakes and Reservoirs   17

-------
         Chlorophyll a is desirable as an endpoint because it closely reflects use impairment
         (often it is the impairment) and because it can usually be closely correlated to
         loading conditions. Both seasonal mean and instantaneous maximum
         concentrations can be used to determine violations, and most  monitoring programs
         already include measurements for chlorophyll.

         Chlorophyll might not be an appropriate endpoint in  instances where use
         impairment is more closely  related to excessive macrophyte or attached algae
         growth.  There also might be instances where the relationship between nutrient
         concentrations and chforphyll response is highly variable and difficult to predict.
         Laws and Chalup  (1990), for example, have shown that the correlation between
         growth rate and chlorophyll axarbon is positive under nutrient-limited conditions
         and negative under nutrient-saturated (light-limited) conditions. This might
         complicate the ability to make  management decisions based on targeted chlorophyll
         concentrations.  Other potential drawbacks associated with using chlorophyll
         include the lack of a standardized testing methodology and its high spatial and
         temporal variability.

         Secchi Depth. Due to its simplicity  and low cost, Secchi depth is the most widely
         used surrogate for estimating algal biomass and, subsequently, trophic state
         (Michaud, 1991).  It is, however, a much  more indirect measure and subject to
         interferences from a variety of sources. Secchi depth has been shown to  be highly
         correlated  to chlorophyll a concentrations (Rast and Lee,  1978) and is a
         particularly important measure because water clarity  is easily perceived by the
         public (Thomann and Mueller, .1977). However, lake and reservoir managers must
         still be able to relate desired Secchi  depths with nutrient loads. Secchi depth
         might be a reliable indicator of the trophic state of a waterbody provided that
         water clarity is primarily dependent  on algal biomass (i.e., the amounts of
         inorganic turbidity and color present in the water column are low).

         Six states reported using Secchi depth as a eutrophication-based water quality
         standard in 1988 (NALMS,  1988), and Raschke (1993) reports on  using a mean
         growing season Secchi depth endpoint of >1.5 meters for water supply
         impoundments in  the southeastern Piedmont. For impoundments used for fishing
         and swimming, >1 meter is considered acceptable.  Secchi depth was also
          included as one of the parameters to be used in  the surface waters component of
         the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program  (EMAP) (Whittier and
         Paulsen, 1992).

          Other biological response factors that have potential for use as water quality
          endpoints  include the following:

          Macrophyte Coverage or  Density. Newbry et al. (1981) recommend using percent
          macrophyte coverage as a potential  nutrient enrichment endpoint.  Specifically, the
          endpoint would be the percentage of the waterbody having a depth of 2 meters or

18     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 less that is impaired by macrophyte growth during peak recreation use.  Other
 researchers have suggested a similar approach, but a somewhat deeper cutoff point
 (Porcella et al., 1980).  This potential endpoint might be particularly appropriate
 for those shallow lakes and reservoirs where users are aware of and sensitive to
 changes in the abundance and distribution of macrophytes (e.g., the southeastern
 United States).  One confounding issue related to macrophyte density is the
 positive relationship between increasing water clarity  and the extent of macrophyte
 beds (Quinn, 1991). A limitation involved with using macrophyte measurements
 as endpoints is the difficulty involved with predicting whether a system will be
 dominated by macrophytes or plankton.

 Fish Yields/Quality. Lee and Jones (1991) discuss the effects of eutrophication on
 fisheries and also introduce an approach for estimating the fish  yield that can be
 associated with changing phosphorus loadings. Fish yields were also included as
 indicators in the surface waters component of the Environmental Monitoring and
 Assessment Program (Whittier and Paulsen, 1992). This endpoint is obviously
 attractive for lakes or reservoirs where fishing  is a primary use.

 Biological Indicators.  A number of states have used biological  indicators  in
 setting stream and river standards, although it does not appear that  any have
 developed indices specifically designed for lakes or reservoirs (Hughes et al.,
 1992).  Proposed biological indicators have attempted  to incorporate information
 on fish, benthic invertebrates, zooplankton assemblages, algae, macrophytes, etc.
 An advantage of using  biological indicators is that they are not as subject to
 temporal variability  as are chemical pollutants (NALMS,  1992). However, a
 disadvantage associated with biological  indicators is that they might reflect
 impairments not necessarily caused by cultural  eutrophication (i.e.,  they are better
 at indicating change itself than they are at providing information on the cause of
 change (Hughes et al.,  1992).

 Sedimentary Diatom Assemblages. The emerging field of paleolimnology has
 shown that sedimentary diatom assemblages can be used to determine  baseline
 trophic conditions and natural variability in lakes and reservoirs  (Dixit et al.,
 1992). In addition to providing information on  historical conditions, these algal
 microfossils can also be used to detect water quality trends occurring during more
 recent  years; they could therefore serve as  potential early warning indicators of
 eutrophication. Sedimentary diatom assemblages were  one of the parameters
 measured as part of  the Northeast Lakes Pilot of the Environmental Monitoring
 and Assessment Program (Larsen et al., 1991; Hughes  et al.,  1992).

 Other Factors

Dissolved Oxygen Concentration. Dissolved oxygen concentration could be used
as a eutrophication endpoint in  waterbodies where a primary concern is support of
aquatic life. It could be measured as end of summer concentration  in the

                                                        Lakes and Reservoirs    19

-------
          hypolimnion, the date at which a lake or reservoir becomes anoxic, or the length of
          time a system is anoxic. Problems associated with using dissolved oxygen as an
          endpoint are related to the  high spatial and temporal variability in  its measurement
          and the fact  that some reservoirs  (especially southeastern ones) can display rapid
          changes between anoxia and oxia.

          Others. Other water quality parameters that have at times been mentioned as
          potential eutrophication endpoints include extent of submerged aquatic  vegetation
          (USEPA, 1994b),  odor and taste  indicators (Hughes and Paulsen, 1990;  Seligman
          et al.,  1992), and treatment plant chlorine demand (Lee et al.,  I995a). These
          potential endpoints might prove to be most appropriate where  they relate to
          specific considerations in individual lakes and reservoirs. They might be less
          applicable across state or ecoregion boundaries than the endpoints  discussed
          previously.

          State of the Science—Models

          A discussion of the issues  involved with assessing nutrient overenrichment in lakes
          and reservoirs would be incomplete without addressing the use of  water quality
          models. As mentioned in  the introduction to the issue papers, numerous watershed
          loading models  are available for  the assessment of nutrient overenrichment, many
          of which can be applied across multiple waterbody types.  A  summary is provided
          here of some of the receiving water models that are especially useful for predicting
          and assessing the  eutrophication  process in lakes and reservoirs. These summaries
          were prepared based on  information from the revised Compendium of Tools for
          Watershed Assessment and TMDL Development (USEPA, in review). References
          pertaining to each of these models are listed in a separate section at the end of this
          paper.

          EUTROMOD.  EUTROMOD is a spreadsheet-based watershed and lake modeling
          procedure developed for eutrophication management, with an emphasis on
          uncertainty analysis. The  model estimates nutrient loading, various trophic state
          parameters,  and trihalomethane concentration using data on land use, pollutant
          concentrations,  and lake characteristics.  The model was developed using empirical
          data from the USEPA's national eutrophication survey, with trophic state models
          utilized to relate phosphorus and nitrogen loading to in-Iake nutrient
          concentrations.  The phosphorus and nitrogen concentrations were then  related to
          maximum chlorophyll level, Secchi depth, dominant algal species, hypolimnetic
          dissolved oxygen  status, and trihalomethane concentration. EUTROMOD allows
          for uncertainty  analysis by considering the error in regression  equations employed,
          and utilizing an annual mean precipitation and coefficient of variation to account
          for hydrologic variability.  EUTROMOD is limited in its application because it is
          designed for watersheds in the Southeast and because it provides only  predictions
20     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 of growing season averages. EUTROMOD is distributed by the North American
 Lake Management Society (NALMS).

 PHOSMOD.  PHOSMOD uses a modeling framework described by Chapra and
 Canale (1991) for assessing the impact of phosphorus loading on stratified lakes.
 A total phosphorus budget for the water layer is developed with inputs from
 external loading, recycling from the sediments, and considering losses due to
 flushing and settling. The sediment-to-water recycling is dependent on the levels
 of sediment total phosphorus and hypoiimnetic oxygen, with the concentration of
 the latter estimated with a semi-empirical model.  PHOSMOD can be  used to make
 daily or seasonal analyses and was developed to assess long-term dynamic trends;
 output includes tabular and graphical output of lake total phosphorus, percentage of
 total phosphorus  in sediment, hypoiimnetic dissolved oxygen concentrations,  and
 days of anoxia. It also  is distributed by NALMS.

 BATHTUB.  BATHTUB applies a series of empirical eutrophication models to
 morphologically complex lakes and reservoirs.  The program performs steady-state
 water and nutrient balance calculations in a spatially segmented hydraulic network
 that accounts for  advective and diffusive transport, and nutrient  sedimentation.
 Eutrophication-related water quality conditions (total phosphorus, total  nitrogen,
 chlorophyll a, transparency, and hypoiimnetic oxygen depletion) are predicted
 using empirical relationships derived  from assessment of reservoir data (Walker,
 1985; 1986).  Applications of BATHTUB are limited to steady-state evaluation of
 relationships  between nutrient-loading, transparency and hydrology, and
 eutrophication responses.  BATHTUB has been cited as an effective tool for  lake
 and reservoir water quality assessment and management, particularly where data
 are limited (Ernst et al., 1994).

 WASPS.  WASPS is a general-purpose modeling system for assessing  the fate and
 transport of conventional and toxic pollutants in surface waterbodies.  Its EUTRO5
 submodel is designed to address eutrophication processes and has been used in a
 wide range of regulatory and water quality management applications.  The model
 may be applied to most  waterbodies in one, two, or three dimensions and can be
 used to predict time-varying concentrations of water quality constituents. It might
 have some limited applications in lakes due to a lack of internal temperature
 simulation. The model reports a set of parameters, including dissolved oxygen
concentration, carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand (BOD), ultimate BOD,
phytoplankton, carbon, chlorophyll a, total nitrogen, total inorganic nitrogen,
ammonia, nitrate,  organic nitrogen, total inorganic nitrogen,  organic phosphorus,
and inorganic phosphorus.  Although  zooplankton dynamics are  not simulated in
EUTRO5, their effect can be described by user-specified forcing functions.

CE-QUAL-W2.  CE-QUAL-W2  is a two-dimensional, longitudinal/vertical water
quality model that can be applied to most waterbody types.  It includes both a
hydrodynamic component (dealing with circulation, transport, and deposition) and

                                                        Lakes and Reservoirs   21

-------
          a water quality component.  The hydrodynamic and water quality routines are
          directly coupled, although the water quality routines can be updated less frequently
          than the hydrodynamic time step to reduce the computational burden in complex
          systems.  Water quality constituents that can be modeled include algae, dissolved
          oxygen, ammonia-nitrogen, nitrate-nitrogen, phosphorus, total inorganic carbon,
          and pH.

          Several limitations are associated with using CE-QUAL-W2 to model nutrient
          overenrichment in  lakes and reservoirs.  Because the model assumes lateral
          homogeneity, it is  best suited for relatively long and  narrow waterbodies that
          exhibit strong longitudinal and vertical water quality  gradients.  It might be
          inappropriate for large waterbodies. The model also has only one algal
          compartment, and  algal succession, zooplankton, and macrophytes cannot be
          modeled.

          CE-QUAL-ICM.  CE-QUAL-ICM incorporates detailed algorithms for water
          quality kinetics and can be applied to most waterbodies in one, two, or three
          dimensions. Interactions among input variables are described in  80 partial
          differential equations that employ more than 40 parameters (Cerco and Cole,
          1993).  Model outputs include temperature; inorganic suspended  solids; diatoms;
          blue-green algae (and other phytoplankton); dissolved,  labile and refractory
          components of particulate organic carbon; organic nitrogen; organic phosphorus;
          ammonium; nitrate and nitrite; total phosphate; and dissolved oxygen. Although
          the model has full  capabilities to simulate state-of-the-art water quality kinetics, it
          is potentially limited by available data for calibration and  verification. In  addition,
          the model might require significant technical expertise  in aquatic biology and
          chemistry to be used appropriately.
22     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Rivers and Streams

       The beneficial uses  supported by the Nation's rivers and streams continue to be
       threatened by the damaging effects of nutrient overenrichment.  Nitrogen and
       phosphorus loadings originating from wastewater treatment plants, agricultural
       fields, industrial  discharges and other sources are contributing to excessive plant
       growths in rivers and streams of all  sizes and in all regions.  These plant growths
       can clog water intake pipes, use up precious dissolved oxygen when they decay,
       and interfere with fishing and other recreational  uses.  As an indication of the
       extent of this problem, the most recent National Water Quality Inventory Report to
       Congress stated that nutrients were the second leading cause  of impairment  in
       assessed rivers and streams, behind only siltation (USEPA, 1994a).  State officials
       reported that nutrients had negatively impacted 37 percent of all the assessed river
       and stream miles in  the country.

       Although the damaging effects of nutrient overenrichment have been recognized
       for some time, many states and local communities continue to struggle with
      developing an effective strategy for addressing the issue.  Rivers and streams are
      complicated systems, and it is difficult to accurately assess the nature  of nutrient
      loadings as well as their  impact on the growth of nuisance vegetation.  Managers
      are also handicapped by their need to consider the role rivers and streams play as
      conduits through which nutrients are carried into and impact other waterbodies,
      such as lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries.

      Background

      In rivers and  streams, eutrophication can  result from an increase in the supply of
      inorganic nutrients such as nitrates, ammonia, and soluble reactive phosphorus.
      For the purposes of this paper, the focus will be on nutrient overenrichment that
      occurs as a consequence of human activity and results in the impairment of river
      and stream  beneficial uses (e.g., fishing, swimming, and drinking water supply).
      To better understand  the linkage between nutrient loading and impaired uses, one
      must first realize there are various types of rivers and streams that can be affected
      by  eutrophication.

      Rivers and streams represent a diverse set of waterbody systems, ranging from the
      deep, slow-flowing lower Mississippi to the cascading, coldwater mountain streams
      of the Rockies.  A number of different concepts have been used to describe this
      diversity (Johnson et  al., 1995). For example, the river-continuum concept
      specifies that  rivers and streams can  be categorized according  to stream order.  A
      first-order stream has no tributaries, whereas a second-order stream is formed when
      two first order streams join. When  two second-order streams meet, they form a
      third-order stream and so  on (Johnson et al.,  1995). Within this concept, stream
      orders of first to third are considered small streams, fourth to sixth are considered

                                                              Rivers and Streams     23

-------
          medium-sized rivers, and those greater than sixth order are considered large rivers.

          The significance of the stream order concept is that the structure and function of
          small stream biotic communities are very much different from those of large rivers
          (Johnson et al., 1995).   For example, in small forest streams the existence of a
          canopy reduces the amount of light available for  photosynthesis. This means that
          the primary energy source  is likely to be terrestrial leaf litter and the dominant
          invertebrate species will be shredders and collectors.  Conversely, there is typically
          more light available in mid-size rivers; the main energy source is autochthonous
          production1, and the dominant invertebrate groups are grazers that feed by scraping
          algae and microbes off rocks (Johnson et al.,  1995).  These grazers can have a
          profound impact on whether nutrient-enriched benthic algae  will grow to nuisance
          levels (Walton et al.,  1995).

          In addition to the continuum concept, rivers and streams can be described
          according to their  flow characteristics. A high-gradient stream is one that is
          located along relatively steep slopes,  displays relatively high velocities, and is
          more likely to have rapids, Whitewater, and similar features; low-gradient streams,
          on the other hand, follow more gradual terrain and therefore have slower currents
          and longer residence times. The distinct physical conditions that exist in these  two
          types of systems have a significant impact on eutrophication conditions.  For
          example, research  has shown that the growth of benthic algae  can be highly
          dependent  on stream current velocity (Horner et al., 1990; Welch, 1989; see
          discussion  below).

          Another way to distinguish different types of rivers and streams, and the one that
          is perhaps  of most significance for the purposes of this paper, is by their dominant
          plant types.   Plankton-dominated systems are those with large populations of
          freely floating microscopic plants such as diatoms, blue-green algae, and flagellates
          (Quinn, 1991). Periphyton (or benthic algae)-dominated systems, on the other
          hand, are impaired by plants that grow attached to the streambed or on solid
          objects like logs.  One of the most common groups of benthic algae are the
          filamentous greens, such as Cladophora.  The nuisance effects of both  plankton
          and periphyton are described in Tables 1  and 2 (adapted from Quinn, 1991).

          The  processes governing the growth of nuisance  plants (especially periphyton) in
          rivers and  streams are not  nearly as straightforward as they  are for other
          waterbodies.  In lakes, for example, the biomass  of plankton per unit volume of
          water is proportional  to the initial mass of limiting nutrient per unit volume (Welch
          et al., 1989).  This relationship, which has been shown in the  laboratory and
    'Autochthonous production refers to production originating in the river itself (as opposed to being from
terrestrial sources),

24     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Table 1. Potential nuisance effects of excessive phytoplankton growth with possible
 nutrient enrichment endpoints (from Quinn,  1991).
Water Uses
Water Supply
Aesthetic appeal
Recreation
Aquaculture
Ecosystem Protection
Nuisance Effects
• Taste and odor problems
* Production of toxins (e.g., by blue-green algae)
• Blockage of intake screens and filters
* Disruption of ffocculation and chlorination processes in
water treatment plants.
• Reduced clarity and altered color
* Surface scums (including "red tides") and floating mats
• Boating, swimming, water skiing and other water-based
recreation restricted or degraded.
• Fish kills (via toxicity)
• Shellfish contamination resulting in human poisoning
* Diurnal fluctuations in pH and dissolved oxygen that can
stress or eliminate sensitive species
• Oxygen depletion in bottom water through decay of organic
material eliminates sensitive species and releases sediment
phosphorus
• Reduced light penetration may cause macrophyte decline
Possible
Endpoints
• Odor and taste
indicators
• Cost of
treatment
* Secchi depth
* Secchi depth
• Chlorophyll a
• Fish advisories
• pH
• Dissolved
oxygen
• Secchi depth
Table 2.  Potential nuisance effects of excessive periphyton growth (from Quinn, 1991).
Water Uses
Water Supply
Aesthetic appeal
Recreation
Ecosystem Protection
Nuisance Effects
• Blockage of intake screens and filters
• Reduced clarity and altered color due to sloughed material
• Floating mats
* Strandings on river margins during flow recessions cause
odor
• Swimming and other water based recreation restricted or
degraded due to aesthetic degradation
* Slippery bed makes wading dangerous
• Sloughed material fouls fisher' lines and nets
• Dense algal mats restrict invertebrates preferred as food by
sports fish
• Diurnal fluctuations in pH and dissolved oxygen that can
stress or eliminate sensitive species
• Dense mats covering the bed reduce intergravel flow and
habitat quality for benthtc invertebrates and fish spawning
Possible
Endpoints
• Cost of
treatment
• Black disk.
* Biomass
• Odor indicators
• Biomass
• Black disk
• pH
* Dissolved
oxygen
* Biomass
                                                              Rivers and Streams
25

-------
          frequently observed in the field (e.g., VoIIenweider, 1968; Lee et al.,  1995) makes
          the selection of nutrient endpoints for lakes and other lentic systems somewhat
          clear (i.e., a certain algal  biomass is expected given a certain nutrient
          concentration).  Such a linear relationship between  ambient  nutrient concentrations
          and periphyton  biomass has not been observed in rivers and streams (Jones et al.,
          1984) and may  not exist (Welch,  1994). A number of factors other than nutrient
          concentration govern periphyton biomass growth in rivers and streams, and the
          quantitative relationship between nutrient supplies and algal biomass in  lotic
          systems has not yet been  well characterized (Dodds and Smith, 1995).  Nutrients
          receive the most attention only because the other factors are nearly impossible to
          control (Ingman, 1992).

          One of the most important factors controlling periphyton growth in rivers and
          streams is velocity. Horner et al.  (1990) and others have shown in laboratory
          streams that biomass growth is positively related to stream velocity in the range of
          0 to 60 cm/s (after which  increases in velocity decrease biomass growth by
          increasing erosion  due to abrasion by suspended sediments.) Researchers believe
          that higher stream  velocities enhance algal growth "by reducing the thickness of
          the ...  nutrient-depleted  laminar boundary layer adjacent to the growing surface"
          (Dodds and Smith,  1995).

          As mentioned previously,  grazing pressure might also play a significant, non-
          nutrient-dependent role in periphyton growth.  Grazing by aquatic insects has been
          shown to affect periphyton populations by  decreasing biomass, affecting primary
          productivity, and changing the taxonomic composition and community structure
          (Walton et al.,  1995). Other important factors that affect nuisance plant growth
          include  frequency of scouring floods, quantity  of suspended sediment, degree of
          shading, and types of substrata (Quinn,  1991).  Water resource managers must
          recognize that the eutrophication process in rivers and streams is governed by the
          interactions between all of these various factors. They make the adoption of an
          effective, comprehensive  nutrient enrichment strategy for rivers a complex process.

          State of the Science—Endpoints

          Selecting Endpoints

          A review of the available literature suggests that there are several examples of
          rivers and streams with different nutrient enrichment endpoints already  in place.
          These are described below along with other water quality parameters that could
          serve as endpoints in certain situations.  The complete list of endpoints identified
          by participants  in the National Nutrient Assessment Workshop is shown in the
          Table 3.
26     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  Table 3.  Potential Endpoints for Plankton- and Periphyton- Dominated Systems.
               Plankton Dominated
   Algal biomass
   pH (maximum and diel)
   Dissolved Oxygen (minimum and diel)
   Transparency (Secchi depth)
   Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index,
     community composition)
   Total suspended  solids, volatile suspended solids,
    ratios
   Dissolved organic material
   Autotrophic Index (AFDW/CNa)
   Total nitrogen
   Total phosphorus

   Ratios of summer/winter nutrient concentrations
   Ratios of dissolved/total nutrient concentrations
   Aesthetics (foam, scum)
                                                             Periphyton Dominated
 Algal biomass (mg/nr, percent coverage)
 pH (maximum and diel)
 Dissolved Oxygen (minimum and diel)
 Transparency (Black disk)
 Biointegrity (macroinvertebrate index,
  community composition)
 Total suspended solids, volatile suspended solids,
  ratios
 Dissolved organic material
 Autotrophic Index (AFDW/chl a)
 Total nitrogen, dissolved inorganic nitrogen
 Total phosphorus, soluble reactive
  phosphorus
 Ratios of summer/winter nutrient concentrations
 Ratios of dissolved/total nutrient concentrations
Aesthetics (foam, scum)
 Periphyton Biomass.  Perhaps the most obvious example of an endpoint for
 periphyton-dominated rivers and streams would be periphyton biomass.  Periphyton
 biomass can be measured either qualitatively (e.g., no visible growths on hand-held
 stones) or quantitatively (e.g., ash-free dry weight or milligrams of chlorophyll a
 per square meter) (Quinn, 1991).  The primary advantage of this measurement is
 that it directly reflects the water quality characteristic that impairs use.  In this way
 biomass endpoints force managers to focus on all  of the factors  that contribute to
 periphyton growth, instead of relying only on nutrient controls to provide relief.
 (For example, repairing the canopy in a small river could potentially cause light  to
 become a limiting factor.) The primary disadvantage associated with using
 periphyton biomass as an endpoint is the cost and difficulty associated with its
 monitoring.

 An example of the adoption  of algal biomass as a target is in the Clark Fork River
 in the states of Washington,  Idaho, and Montana.  The target  is a mean value of
 100 rng chlorophyll aim2  and a maximum value of 150 mg chlorophyll  aim2.
 These values were chosen based on a literature review performed to determine
 what levels of algae interfere with  beneficial  water uses (Ingman, 1992), and  they
 resemble levels proposed  by  Horner et al. (1983) and Welch et al. (1988).  The
 targets have been adopted as part of the Clark Fork - Pend Oreille Basin
 Management Plan (USEPA,  1993).  A variety of actions have been planned to
 achieve these targets, including instituting a basinwide phosphorus detergent ban
 and making improvements at municipal wastewater treatment  facilities.

Dissolved Oxygen Concentration.  Dissolved oxygen concentrations are an ideal
endpoint where the primary beneficial use to  be  protected is support of aquatic life.
                                                           Rivers and Streams
                               27

-------
           Such an endpoint could be stated as a minimum daily value or as an average value
           over a certain period (e.g., weekly, monthly, or seasonally). The advantage of
           using a daily minimum value is that this reflects what organisms (especially fish)
           respond to.  However, practical limitations involved with daily monitoring of
           dissolved oxygen have often meant that the standard applies to a longer period of
           time.  The spatial variability associated with dissolved oxygen readings also makes
           a longer monitoring period attractive.  Current criteria for dissolved oxygen in
           ambient fresh waters have been established primarily on the basis of lethal
           conditions for freshwater fish (USEPA, 1986.)  The criteria stipulate 30-day means
           of 6.5 and 5.5 mg/L and an acute, one-day (instantaneous)  minima of 4.0 mg/Land
           3.0 mg/L for cold waters and warm waters, respectively.

           pH.  pH measurements might be another parameter that is useful in instances
           where protection of aquatic life is of utmost importance.  pH levels in gravel-
           bottom rivers with large periphyton biomass can be as high as 10, severely
           restricting  the ability  of stream organisms to function normally.  A difficulty
           associated  with  this parameter is that factors other than eulrophication might be
           affecting water acidity.  One advantage of using pH as an endpoint  is that pH can
           be inexpensively monitored by nontechnical  personnel.

           Transparency.  Transparency, as measured by Secchi depth, would be a very
           effective nutrient overenrichment endpoint in those rivers and streams which are
           plankton-dominated.  Its advantages include  its simplicity, low cost, and
           acceptability (Michaud,  1991).  Its chief disadvantage in terms of assessing nutrient
           overenrichment  is that it is only an indirect indicator of eutrophication.  One
           cannot tell strictly from Secchi readings whether a  river is impaired by high algal
           growths or by some other  conditions, such as elevated levels of suspended
           sediments  or color. Transparency would not be an appropriate indicator in  high-
           gradient, periphyton-dominated systems.

           Biointegrity/Macroinvertebrate Index.  A number of states have used biological
           indicators  in setting stream and river standards  (Hughes et al., 1992). The Ohio
           EPA uses  the index of biotic integrity (IBI), for example, to assess the aquatic life
           in its rivers and streams (Hughes et al., 1992).  Biological indicators are
           advantageous in that they relate broadly to ecological condition,  which is a primary
           concern of the public.  However, it may be difficult to use  these indicators  in
           situations where a number of factors  (in addition to nutrient enrichment) are
           affecting biotic integrity.

           Nitrogen.  Nitrogen concentrations can serve as  useful endpoints in those systems
           where nitrogen is potentially the limiting factor.  They can  be measured as  either
           total nitrogen or dissolved inorganic nitrogen (nitrate, nitrite, and ammonia).
           However,  limiting concentrations in severely enriched waters might often be so
           low  as to preclude serving as practical targets. This might  be especially true for
           rivers affected by the filamentous green species Cladophora, which is able  to

28     An Overview of  Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 survive in relatively  low nitrogen environments (Ingman, 1992).  The lack of
 understanding concerning the level of nuisance vegetative growth associated with
 nitrogen concentrations  may also pose a challenge to using  this nutrient as an
 endpoint.  As  mentioned above,  other factors such as stream velocity, grazing
 populations, and light availability are likely to play an important  role in periphyton
 growth.

 Nevertheless, nitrogen concentration endpoints might still provide a variety of
 useful purposes.  Where the limiting concentration is known, for  instance, it could
 serve as the long-term goal of a  nutrient management plan.  Somewhat higher
 values could then be adopted as  intermediate goals.  Nitrogen endpoints could also
 be used to control the extent of nuisance growth, if not the  total yield. Data
 suggest, for example, that nutrient additions beyond  the range of  40 to 100 jug/L
 dissolved inorganic nitrogen will not the increase periphyton yield immediately
 downstream of a discharge, but might  increase the downstream extent of
 periphyton proliferations (Quinn, 1991).  A nitrogen endpoint  that aims to limit the
 distance downstream at which periphyton growth reaches nuisance levels could
 therefore be instituted.

 The nitrogen targets in the Clark Fork management plan mentioned earlier are 300
 ug/L total nitrogen and 30 ug/L dissolved inorganic nitrogen (Ingman, 1992).
 These levels were based on the nitrogen concentrations  found  in reaches of the
 Clark Fork where algae are  not a frequent problem.

 Phosphorus.  As with nitrogen,  phosphorus endpoints (measured  as either total
 phosphorus  or  soluble reactive phosphorus) are not as easy to  implement in rivers
 and streams as they are in lakes  and reservoirs.  Again,  limiting concentrations
 might be so low as to be difficult to achieve and an adequate relationship between
 phosphorus  and algal growth might not be available. For the Spokane River,
 Welch et al. (1989) report that biomass levels exceeding 200 mg chlorophyll aim2
 can  persist for  more  than 10 km downstream from a point source  unless soluble
 reactive phosphorus concentrations are held below 10 ug/L.  Bothwell (1985, 1988)
 reports that  streams can be phosphorus-saturated at concentrations as low as < 1 to
 4 ug/L.

 Summer phosphorus targets  in the Clark Fork  River were set at 6 ug/L soluble
 reactive phosphorus and  20  ug/L  total phosphorus. These were based on ambient
 levels in relatively unimpaired reaches  of the river (Ingman,  1992).

 Ratio of Dissolved to Total Nutrient Concentrations and  Ratio of
Summer/Winter Nutrient Concentrations.  In addition to using  strict nutrient
concentrations as endpoints, another possible methodology is to base management
decisions on the ratios of either dissolved to total  nutrients or summer to winter
concentrations.  The  nitrogen-to-phosphorus ratio, both of loadings and of standing
concentrations,  can provide important insight regarding which nutrient should be

                                                         Rivers and  Streams     29

-------
           controlled.  Nitrogen and phosphorus are taken up by algae in an approximately
           constant ratio of 16 atoms of nitrogen per I  atom of phosphorus, or 7.2:1 by
           weight.  The practical range around this number  is 10 to 20 (Chiaudani and Vighi
           1974; Boynton et al.,  1995; Thomann  and Mueller,  1987).  Waters with relative
           concentrations, then, of <10:1 nitrogen to phosphorus might have insufficient
           nitrogen for algal uptake relative to the available phosphorus.  Nitrogen availability
           limits plant growth in these situations.  When nitrogemphosphorus is >20, the
           converse  might be true: phosphorus becomes the limiting nutrient for plant
           production. An assessment of potential limitation at intermediate values is
           problematic. Complicating factors involve other limitations (e.g., light), the
           presence  of nitrogen-fixing algae, and the availability of the forms of nitrogen  and
           phosphorus present. Bioassays have been  used to assess nutrient limitation; for
           fresh waters, a standardized test has been developed.

           Others.  Numerous other water quality measurements could potentially serve as
           nutrient overenrichment endpoints.  Some of these might be appropriate for certain
           regions or for specific rivers with unique considerations.  Many of the following
           measurements are not  ideal overenrichment endpoints because they describe
           conditions that might be unrelated to nutrient loading. They might best be used in
           combination with some of the other measurements described previously.

                 •   Total and volatile suspended solids concentrations
                 •   Dissolved organic material
                 •   Benthic community metabolism
                 •   Sediment composition (organics, size fraction, nutrients, profile,
                     sediment fluxes)
                 •   Secondary production (meiofauna, macroinvertebrates, fish)
                 •   Production/respiration
                 •   Aesthetics (foam, scum)
30     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Plankton
Load/response
relationships


QUAL2E


WASPS
CEQUAL-RIV1,
W2
HSPF
Periphyton
Concentration/
response
relationships




9
Research needs <

'x
aj
0.
o
(J
£
ca
0

identified

                Figure I. Models/assessment tools available for
                plankton and periphyton dominated systems.
 State of the Science—Receiving Water Models

 Several widely available simulation models can be used to assess aspects of the
 nutrient overenrichment process in rivers and streams (see Figure 1, for example).
 Plankton-dominated systems can be well described by currently available models
 that incorporate the dynamics of algal growth.  Modeling of periphyton-dominant
 systems is limited by  our understanding of the  growth processes.  Because the
 underlying chemical, physical, and biological processes are so complex, the
 accuracy that can be attained from using these  models varies.  Nevertheless, the
 ability to  predict nutrient and dissolved oxygen concentrations, as well as algae and
 macrophyte  levels, is essential  to the water quality management process.  The
 following summaries describe the state of the science regarding the available
 models.  The descriptions are based on information from the revised Compendium
 of Tools for Watershed Assessment and TMDL  Development (USEPA, in review).

 QUAL2E. The Enhanced Stream Water Quality Model (QUAL2E), originally
 developed in the early 1970s, is a one-dimensional water quality model that
 assumes steady-state flow but allows simulation of diurnal variations in
 temperature or algal photosynthesis and respiration (Brown and Barnwell, 1987.)
 QUAL2E  represents the stream as a system of reaches of variable length,' each of
 which is subdivided into computational elements that have the same length in all
 reaches.  Withdrawals, branches, and tributaries can be incorporated into the
prototype  representation  of the  stream system. The basic equation used in
QUAL2E  is  the one-dimensional advection-dispersion mass transport equation. An
implicit, backward difference scheme, averaged over time and space, is employed
                                                       Rivers and Streams
31

-------
          to solve the equation. Water quality parameters simulated include conservative
          substances, temperature, bacteria, biochemical oxygen demand, dissolved oxygen,
          ammonia, nitrate, organic nitrogen, phosphate, organic phosphorus, and algae.
          QUAL2E includes components that allow quick implementation of uncertainty
          analysis using sensitivity analysis, first-order error analysis, or Monte Carlo
          simulation.  The model has been widely used for stream waste load allocations and
          discharge permit determinations in the United States and other countries. Paschal
          and Muller (1991) used  QUAL2E to evaluate the effects of wastewater effluent on
          the South Platte River from Chatfield reservoir through Denver, Colorado, and
          Johnson and Mercer (1994) report a QUAL2E application  to the Chicago waterway
          and Upper Illinois River waterway to predict dissolved oxygen and other
          constituents in the dissolved oxygen cycle in response to various water pollution
          controls.   EPA's Office of Science and Technology recently developed a Microsoft
          Windows-based interface for QUAL2E that  facilitates data input and output
          evaluation.

          WASPS.  WASPS is a general-purpose modeling system for assessing the fate and
          transport of conventional and toxic pollutants in surface waterbodies.  Its EUTRO5
          submodel is designed to address eutrophication processes and has been used in a
          wide range of regulatory and water quality management applications.  The model
          may be applied to most waterbodies in one, two, or three dimensions and can be
          used to predict time-varying concentrations of water quality constituents. The
          model  reports  a set of parameters, including dissolved oxygen concentration,
          carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand (CBOD), ultimate BOD, phytoplankton
          carbon and chlorophyll a, total nitrogen, total inorganic nitrogen, ammonia, nitrate,
          organic nitrogen,  total inorganic nitrogen, organic phosphorus,  and inorganic
          phosphorus. Although zooplankton dynamics are not simulated in EUTRO5, their
          effect can be described by  user-specified forcing functions. Lung and Larson
          (1995) used EUTRO5 to evaluate phosphorus loading reduction scenarios for the
          Upper  Mississippi River and Lake Pepin, while Cockrum and Warwick (1994)
          used WASP to characterize the impact of agricultural activities on instream water
          quality in a periphyton-dominated stream. Stoddard et al.  (1995)  describe a fully
          three-dimensional application of EUTRO5 in conjunction with  the EFDC
          hydrodynamic model to  assess the effectiveness of options for  the removal of total
          nitrogen from  a wastewater treatment plant.

          CE-QUAL-RIV1. The  Hydrodynamic and  Water Quality Model for Streams (CE-
          QUAL-RIV1) was developed to simulate transient water quality conditions
          associated with the highly unsteady flows that can occur in regulated rivers.  The
          model  has two submodels for hydrodynamics (RIV1H) and water quality (RIV1Q).
          Output from the hydrodyanmic solution is used to drive the water quality model.
          Water  quality constituents modeled include temperature, dissolved oxygen,
          carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand, organic nitrogen, ammonia nitrogen,
          nitrate  nitrogen, and  soluble reactive phosphorus. The effects of algae and
32     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 macrophytes can also be included as external forcing functions specified by the
 user.
 CE-QUAL-W2.  CE-QUAL-W2  is a two-dimensional, longitudinal/vertical water
 quality model that can be applied to most waterbodies (Cole and Buchak, 1994),
 It includes both a hydrodynamic component and a water quality component.  CE-
 QUAL-W2 is best applied to stratified waterbodies like reservoirs and narrow
 estuaries where large variations in lateral velocities and constituents do not occur.
 It might not be appropriate for high-flow streams and rivers.  The model simulates
 the interaction of physical factors (such as flow and temperature), chemical factors
 (such as nutrients), and algal interaction. The water quality and hydrodynamic
 routines are directly coupled; however, the water quality routines can be updated
 less frequently than the hydrodynamic time step thereby reducing the computation
 burden  for complex systems. A limitation associated  with using CE-QUAL-W2 to
 address nutrient overenrichment issues  is that it has only one algal compartment
 and algal succession, zooplankton, and macrophytes cannot be modeled.

 CE-QUAL-ICM.   CE-QUAL-ICM was developed as  the integrated-compartment
 eutrophication model component of the Chesapeake Bay model package (Cerco and
 Cole, 1993).  The  model incorporates detailed algorithms for water quality kinetics.
 Interactions among variables are described in 80 partial differential  equations that
 employ more than  140 parameters (Cerco and Cole, 1993).  The state variables can
 be categorized into a group and five cycles—the physical group, and the carbon,
 nitrogen, phosphorus, silica, and dissolved oxygen cycles.  An  improved finite- '
 difference formulation is used to solve the mass conservation equation for each
 grid cell and  for each state variable.  Although the  model has  been designed for
 application in Chesapeake Bay,  it can be applied to other waterbodies. One
 limitation is the difficulty associated with amassing an adequate amount of data for
calibration and verification.  In  addition, the model might require significant
technical expertise in aquatic biology and chemistry to be used appropriately.
                                                        Rivers and Streams     33

-------
   Estuaries and Coastal Waters

          During the National Nutrient Assessment Workshop, several major themes and
          recommendations emerged from the detailed discussions of the estuaries and
          coastal water group.  Perhaps the most pervading challenge in establishing tools
          and standards  for assessment and management of nutrient inputs to aquatic systems
          is the fact that large, real variability exists in physical and biological structure and
          processes among all systems.  This variability means that a given  input might
          result in  different responses.  While science might agree qualitatively about the
          expected response, quantitative prediction is rarely if ever possible within
          acceptable confidence limits. In addition, regional differences in the
          human/societal expectations exist so that what condition is considered  "acceptable"
          is not uniform.  Taken together, these perspectives suggest that arbitrarily defined
          standards of general applicability might be untenable and  strongly call for a
          different approach.

          Most of the group's effort  was initially directed toward what metrics seem
          meaningful, rigorous, and yet practically useful in the assessment of effects.  The
          group set aside for the moment the issue of subjective definition of standards of
          what is acceptable or unacceptable as a basis for regulation.  However these
          standards are defined, they must be based on acceptable measures of dose
          response.

          Faced with this, the estuaries work group approached a consensus that the only
          practical initial approach is to construct empirical relationships between indicator
          responses and probable driving variables.  This is essentially the approach taken by
          Vollenweider  in documenting responses of lakes to phosphorus loading.  Some
          examples of these empirical relationships are clearly significant statistically, but
          they display large variability, even for comparable estuaries.  For only
          plankton-based systems, for example, chlorophyll stocks show a 10-fold range in
          response for similar inputs of total nitrogen.  For other types of systems, however,
          such relationships have not been adequately explored.  The group recommended
          that significant effort be devoted to a careful gathering  of available information for
          a variety of systems, as well as an incisive analysis of relationships.  It must be
          emphasized that is not a menial task.  Care and insight are necessary to evaluate
          each published study  to ensure appropriate comparisons are made.

          A benefit of this approach is that the  power of the method will increase with time.
          As more information  becomes  available, three significant areas of progress in the
          empirical approach can be anticipated.  First, separate relationships might be
          developed for different types of systems, effectively stratifying the variance among
          more similar groups of sites  (e.g., micro- vs. macrotidal). The group separated
          coral reefs, seagrass, and plankton-based systems with this rationale.  Second,
          schemes for parameterizing multiple factors might be developed, within which


34     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 tighter relationships might be possible.  For example, Vollenweider's parameter
 normalized phosphorus input to freshwater turnover time.   Third, as time series of
 data for an increasing number of cases become available, tighter relationships will
 emerge, more strongly suggesting site-specific predictive relationships.

 In some cases, natural year-to-year variability might define  the dose response quite
 accurately  for a given system.  This empirical approach guarantees a number of
 benefits.  With time,  the archive of systems for which diagnostic dose-response
 measurements are available will increase.  Thus, the use of  empirical relationships
 has immediate value, but is also a perfect stimulus for adaptive  management using
 the more predictive relationships that will emerge with time.

 The following discussion identifies several measurement indices for which
 empirical relationships can be determined  in estuaries and coastal waters.   It also
 addresses several tools to assess and identify nutrient limitation and potential
 indicators of historic trends.

 State of the Science—Endpoints

 Clarity. Clarity is a function of the quantity and spectral quality of light  in the
 aquatic environment. Nutrient enrichment affects clarity  through the promotion of
 phytoplankton growth and biornass accumulation. Phytoplankton of various groups
 absorb and  attenuate light in the water column (Kirk, 1983). They shade each other
 and the bottom. At high biomass, conditions of low light selectively favor algal
 species that are adapted to low light or have motility, morphological, and/or
 buoyancy mechanisms that  sustain them near the water surface. By  preventing
 sufficient light from reaching the bottom, they eliminate most benthic primary
 production,  leading to the demise of benthic  algal and vascular plant populations.
 Often these algae are not edible or easily grazed on  by zooplankton and fish
 planktivores, or they lead to gill-clogging in  fish. The result  is a shift in trophic
 status toward a monocultural, algal-dominated system. The fate of this organic
 carbon is microbial breakdown, with  subsequent hypoxia/anoxia and organic
 accumulation in the  sediments.

 However, clarity also has contributing factors that are not the result of nutrient
enrichment. These factors include colored dissolved organic matter,  such as humic
and fulvic acids, which are  the degradation products of organic matter from
terrestrial and aquatic plants and animals. In  some regions, rivers deliver large
quantities of dissolved organic matter into estuarine and coastal  waters. Dissolved
organic matter is a strong absorber of light in the blue region of the spectrum, near
the blue absorption peak of chlorophyll (Kirk, 1983). Of course,  water itself is a
strong absorber in the  red region of the spectrum. The light that penetrates waters
high in dissolved organic matter has a yellow quality and is of little use to plants
regardless of how much is present. Another factor in  clarity not directly related to
                                                  Estuaries and Coastal Waters    35

-------
          nutrient enrichment is the suspended inorganic load, which predominately scatters
          light, again most strongly in the blue region of the spectrum (Kirk,  1983),

          It is clear, then, that with respect to clarity and nutrient enrichment, only certain
          measurement endpoints are applicable. Secchi disk depth, a quick, inexpensive, and
          ubiquitous measure of light penetration,  is indiscriminant with respect to the
          factors affecting clarity.  Also, Secchi disk determinations are subject to  the
          response of the human eye, which is more sensitive to  light  in the middle of the
          visible spectrum, while plants absorb, and therefore require,  light in the  blue and
          red regions of  visible light. Therefore, although Secchi depth is directly  a measure
          of water clarity, it  is not the optimal measure of light penetration pertinent to
          photosynthesis. The diffuse downwelling light attenuation coefficient (Kd) for
          photosynthetically  active radiation (PAR) is an endpoint that can be related to
          water  quality parameters and is relevant for assessment of potential  photosynthesis.
          It also has the  advantage of connecting traditional water quality monitoring and
          modeling parameters with a key indicator of habitat quality for plant production,
          especially for benthic flora. Measurements of Kd are made with quantum light
          sensors. Supporting measurements should include water column chlorophyll a, total
          suspended matter, and if warranted by the water  body,  color or dissolved organic
          matter. Advancement of the science of near-shore aquatic optics  should  involve
          spectral characteristics of light penetration and the optically active constituents in
          estuarine and coastal waters (e.g., Gallegos,  1994; McPherson and Miller, 1987)
          and the relationships between how  light  conditions are  assessed and the  natural
          (temporal) signals and availability of light in the aquatic environment (Morris and
          Tomasko, 1993; Miller and McPherson 1995).

          Hypoxia/Anoxia.  Dissolved oxygen concentration in natural waters is a function
          of physical  and chemical factors that determine solubility and the transport of
          oxygen across  the air-water interface, as well as  the mixing of surface and deep
          waters. Within a  water mass, a mix  of biological processes determine oxygen
          concentration. Phytoplankton in surface waters and, given sufficient light
          penetration, benthic algae and vascular plants produce oxygen via photosynthesis.
          Plant,  animal, and  bacterial respiration consumes oxygen, as do bacterially
          mediated transformations of nitrogen during nitrification (oxidizing ammonium to
          nitrite  and nitrate). Other bacterial processes leading to the reduction of  sulfate and
          carbon dioxide produce sulfide and methane, which react with and provide
          additional demands on dissolved oxygen. Considering especially  these biological
          processes, nutrient  enrichment is often signaled by excessive oxygen production in
          surface waters, leading to supersaturation in some cases, and by hypoxia or anoxia
          in deep waters when excessive plant production is consumed.

          Thus,  dissolved oxygen concentration is one of the major endpoints for  assessment
          of eutrophication in estuaries and coastal waters. Criteria for dissolved oxygen in
          ambient (fresh) waters have been established, principally on  the basis of lethal low
          dissolved oxygen conditions for freshwater fish (USEPA  1986). The criteria

36     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  stipulate 30 day means of 6.5 and 5.5 mg/L and acute, ! day (instantaneous)
  minima of 4.0 and 3.0 mg/L for cold water and warm water, respectively.

  In coastal waters where natural variability is high, long-term records of dissolved
  oxygen concentrations in  both surface and bottom waters might be necessary for
  the evaluation of nutrient  enrichment effects (e.g., Justic et al.,  1987). In estuarine
  and coastal waters, hypoxia, generally where dissolved oxygen concentration drops
  below 2.0 mg |-'  (Harding et al. 1992), is apparent with alterations in the benthic
  macrofaunal community, both in structure and loss of biomass (Smith and Dauer
  1994; Schaffneret al., 1992).

 Submerged Aquatic  Vegetation (SAV) Losses.  SAV is composed of flowering
 vascular plants (angiosperms) that live completely underwater; a few species have
 flowers that protrude through the surface (Hurley, 1990). SAV species are found
 from freshwater to marine habitats. While several  hundred SAV species are known
 from freshwater and brackish habitats, the truly marine species number about 60
 (den Hartog, 1970; Dennison  et al.,  1993). SAV species are relatively sensitive to
 the available underwater light; they require approximately 20 percent of daily
 incident light for their survival in comparison  with other plants (ranging from
 planktonic and benthic algae to forest floor dwellers), which require <1 percent of
 daily incident light (Dennison et al.,  1993; Kenworthy and Haunert,  1991).

 In temperate, nutrient-enriched estuaries such as the Chesapeake Bay, this light
 requirement restricts the maximum depth of occurrence to 1 to 2 meters (MLW).
 Decadal scale changes in water transparency are reflected in the changes in the
 historic distributions of SAV (Orth and Moore, 1983, 1986).  Simulation analysis
 driven by light attenuation  coefficients from sites both with and without present
 SAV beds also suggest sensitivity to available light as a determinant in the survival
 and depth of occurrence  of SAV (Wetzel and Meyers, 1994). Nutrient enrichment
 represents a large factor in water transparency by supporting increased
 phytoplankton biomass. It also enhances epiphytic  growth on SAV leaf surfaces
 themselves, further limiting the light available  to SAV for photosynthesis (Neckles
 et al.,  1993). This  later relationship, however, can be mitigated by extensive
 grazing on epiphytes (Neckles et al., 1993).

 SAV are an important  source of habitat, providing  refuge to juvenile fish and
 shellfish and providing a food source  for fish and waterfowl. Consequently, the
 assessment of SAV provides a direct link between  water quality (nutrients,
chlorophyll a, and suspended sediments) and ecologically and economically
important species. In addition, the use of SAV as an water quality endpoint is not
confounded by  direct human uses, unlike similar assessments for fisheries stocks
(Dennison et al., 1993). Lastly, the sensitive relationship between SAV, water
transparency, and nutrients  makes SAV a good  indicator of habitat quality.
                                                 Estuaries and Coastal Waters    37

-------
          The sensitive nature of SAV relative to available underwater light makes the
          maximum depth of individual SAV beds an indicator of habitat quality.
          Assessment criteria should be related to the species present or potentially able to
          inhabit the site, with targets based on species-specific light requirements for
          growth applied to the maximum depth  observed for the species in pristine sites
          similar to the region of interest. As a guide, a target of not less than 20 percent  of
          daily  irradiance just below the water surface available at the bottom during the
          growing  season of the plant may be set.  At a depth of 2.0 m, this would
          correspond to a downwelling diffuse attenuation coefficient of -ln{0.20)/2.0 = 0.80
          rrr1. Required knowledge includes key SAV species and their light compensation
          points under local conditions, and the desired depth distribution, based on historic
          data obtained prior  to nutrient enrichment or data from  a comparable location.

          Geographic (areal) distribution, in concert with maximum depth  of distribution,
          defines the area of SAV  habitat. The availability of this habitat is important for
          fish, shellfish, and waterfowl. Monitoring, typically on a large scale with remote
          imagery  (aerial photography, satellite imagery), in combination with a GIS
          database approach,  can provide regional areal estimates and the basis for spatial
          and temporal trend  analysis. NOAA's C-CAP program  is evaluating methods and
          building  a database of land (including submerged lands or estuaries) use and biotic
          change using remote sensing techniques (Dobson et al., 1995).

          Monospecific Algal Blooms and Trophic Alterations.  Alterations in either the
          primary production or the consumption of that production can change the state of a
          waterbody. Nutrient enrichment can cause such changes. One such alteration is an
          ultimate  shift from  diatom-dominant production, which  is easily  grazed  on and
          ultimately beneficial to desirable fish stocks, to other phytoplankton groups that  are
          less heavily grazed  on. Additions of nitrogen and/or phosphorus lead to short-term
          increases in diatom production, followed by depletion of dissolved silica (DSi) and
          eventually, the replacement of diatoms with green and blue-green algae as DSi
          concentrations fall into limiting ranges for diatom growth (Schelske and Stoermer,
          1971, 1972). The implications of this for coastal and marine environments were
          made clear by Officer and Ryther (Officer and Ryther,  1980, 1981): food webs and
          fates of phytoplankton carbon are  distinctly  different depending on whether
          primary production is dominated by diatoms or by other algae (including greens,
          flagellates, and blue-greens). Enrichment-induced shifts from a diatom-based food
          web lead to changes in food web structure, away from production of desirable fish
          species toward the production of excessive,  ungrazed algae, which sink and
          promote  bottom water hypoxia/anoxia. Recent reviews of the global implications of
          alterations in the Si:N:P  ratio, including increased potentials for toxic and nuisance
          algal  blooms, food  web alterations, and changes in bottom water oxygen dynamics,
          further suggest that coastal waters that once had excesses of silicon relative  to
          nitrogen  and phosphorus are now  approaching nutrient balance or are experiencing
          seasonal  silicon limitation (Justic et al., 1995; Conley et al., 1993). This suggests
          that coastal areas dominated by direct river  discharge will be subject to increasing

38     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 alterations in plankton composition, increased occurrences of nuisance algal
 blooms, and subsequent changes in trophic structure.

 Although not directly impacted by nutrient enrichment, suspension-feeding
 populations, both benthic  and planktonic, in some cases can exert a primary control
 on algal populations and alter suspended particle concentrations.  Losses of these
 populations by  harvesting (shellfish), disease, increases in suspended  load,
 enrichment-induced hypoxia, or shifts in algal populations represent positive
 feedback on eutrophication effects. That is, a control of algal populations that
 under other circumstances would counter the enrichment effect, fails,  eliciting
 greater negative impacts on  the ecosystem. Furthermore, with respect  to restoration
 goals, in the absence of these "top-down" grazer controls, it may  be more difficult
 or take longe to restore a system using moderate  nutrient  load reductions.

 Dissolved Concentration  Potential. Similar to Vollenweider relationships for
 lakes, Quinn and others (1989) have proposed the use of the dissolved
 concentration potential (DCP) as an index of estuarine  susceptibility to
 eutrophication. In a comparison mode, the DCP uses a constant loading, L= 10,000
 tons/year so that intrinsic physical differences (i.e., flushing ability) among
 estuaries can be  assessed. For evaluation of an individual estuary's status and
 classification relative to the impact of its nutrient loadings, the actual  loading value
 is used for W.

                     DCP=  (W / Qfw) (Vfw / Vtot)
       where:
             W      = nutrient loading  rate (kg d~'),
             Vfw      = volume of freshwater in the estuary (m"1),
             Qfw      = rate of freshwater inflow  (m1 d~'), and
             Vtol      = total  volume  of estuary  (m"1).

 Annual averages are used for inflows and volumes (NOAA, 1985; Klein and
 Orlando, 1989).  Essentially, DCP is a loading factor weighted for total volume and
 freshwater turnover. Orders of magnitude for potential enrichment impact have
 been established: low (0.01-0.10 mg/L, med (0.1-1.0  mg/L), high (1.0-10 mg/L).
 Limitations of this index are  (1) it assumes conservative behavior  of bioactive
 nutrient elements; (2) the oceanic nutrient source is neglected; (3) it assumes a
 vertically homogeneous estuarine water mass; (4)  it ignores variability (seasonal,
 aperiodic) in discharges; and  (5) to be applicable,  it requires a gradient in salinity
 relative to the seawater source (e.g.,  DCP would be a poor predictor of
 susceptibility in estuaries dominated  by seawater inputs such as Cape Cod Bay).

NOAA's National Estuarine Inventory (NEI) has tabulated estimates of nitrogen
and phosphorus concentrations for given  estuaries.  Note that the estimates are
based on loadings and are subject to error resulting from the relative degree of
recycling within an  estuary, which might be very high (Boynton et al., 1982; Kemp

                                                   Estuaries and Coastal Waters    39

-------
           et al., 1982), Based on this and on observations of eutrophication impacts within
           estuaries and the DCP, classifications of nutrient concentrations were developed:

                  Nitrogen: low (<0.1 mg/L), medium (0.1-1.0 mg /L), high (>I.O rng/L).
                  Phosphorus: low (<0.0i  mg/L), medium (0.01-0.10 mg/L), high (>0.10
                  mg/L)

           The utility of this classification scheme is problematic. The loadings from which
           concentrations were estimated are based on total inputs, some portion of which
           (particularly in the case of phosphorus) might not be available to plants because of
           its chemical form.  Further, estimates based on loadings might not reflect actual
           concentrations because of the intensity of recycling within a particular estuary or
           subestuary (Boynton et al., 1982). They also do not take into account the relative
           recycling rates of nitrogen versus phosphorus or the denitrification potential, which
           is a significant loss of nitrogen  in estuarine systems (Seitzinger, 1988).

           Nitrogen:Phosphorus Ratio.  Another proposed indicator of potential enrichment
           problems is the nitrogen-to-phosphorus ratio, both of loadings and of standing
           concentrations. Nitrogen and phosphorus are taken up by algae in an approximately
           constant ratio of 16 atoms of nitrogen per 1 atom of phosphorus, or 7.2:1 by
           weight. The practical range around this number is 10-20 (Chiaudani and  Vighi,
           1974; Boynton et al, 1995; USEPA,  1985). Waters with relative concentrations,
           then, of <10:1  nitrogen to phosphorus might have insufficient nitrogen for algal
           uptake  relative to the available phosphorus. Nitrogen availability limits plant
           growth in these situations. When nitrogen:phosphorus  is >20, the converse might
           be true: phosphorus becomes  the limiting nutrient for plant production. An
           assessment  of potential limitation at intermediate values is problematic.
           Complicating  factors involve other limitations (e.g., light), the presence of
           nitrogen-fixing algae, and the availability of the forms of nitrogen and phosphorus
           present. Bioassays  have been  used to assess nutrient limitation; for fresh  waters, a
           standardized test has been developed.

           Biological Indicators.  Detection of incipient change resulting from  nutrient
           enrichment  relies on consistent and continuous monitoring programs. The natural
           variability inherent in measurement endpoints from estuarine and coastal  waters
           makes the interpretation of trends difficult unless a sufficient multiyear record, i.e.,
           10 years or more, is available, especially  if biological  variables are to be used as
           indicators.

           Benthic fauna biomass  and composition, larval fish abundance, and algal and
           zooplankton species composition are both affected by  and may be good substitutes
           for primary endpoints like dissolved oxygen and nutrient concentrations.  The  use
           of these biological indicators as measurement endpoints provides a fundamental
           link between water quality and habitat quality, as  well as stated assessment
           endpoint objectives, i.e., the maintenance of beneficial algal populations, a healthy

40     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
            benthic fauna, and desired abundances of commercially or recreationally important
            fish stocks, for restoration plans.

            Tools to Assess and Identify Nutrient Limitation

            Algal Growth Potential Test.  The Algal Growth Potential  Test (AGPT)
            reviewed by Raschke and Schultz (1987), provides a means  to assess and'identify
            potential nutrient  limitation and the potential impacts of increased concentrations of
            a given nutrient on the resultant algal  production. Bottle assays of Selenastrum
            capriconutum, a freshwater alga, using various test waters (fresh waters only)
            based on the premise that yield is proportional to the bioavailable nutrient in least
            supply (Liebig's Law of the Minimum) can be used to define nutrient limitation.
            The advantage of  this test as a standard method is its simplicity and low cost.
            Yields respond to  bioavailable portions of total nitrogen and total phosphorus
            pools. There is no need to assume which  nutrient element is  limiting, nor assume a
            maximum potential growth rate. The test can give maximum potential growth rate
            estimates and identify the limiting nutrient. The disadvantages are the questionable
            applicability of a standard organism to site-specific, species-specific responses; i.e.,
            the test does not consider the ecological or trophic relationships of native species "
            and their grazers. There appears to  be  a need to establish relationship between  the
            test maximum allowable biomass of Selenastrum capriconutum and that for the
            native suite of species present in the waterbody of interest.

           Enzyme Assays,  In estuarine and coastal waters, as well as  in fresh waters,
           enzyme assays have been used to assess phosphorus limitation. Vadstein et al.
           (1988) and Vargo  and Shaney (1985) have shown that phytoplankton alkaline
           phosphatase (AP)2  activity might be related to phosphorus limitation. In addition,
           bacterial AP as well as  S'-nucleotidase (5PN), which cleaves  the phosphate moiety
           off nucleotides and other organic phosphorus sources, might be indicative of
           phosphorus-limited systems or might increase the pool of bioavailable phosphorus
           (Ammerman and Azam, 1991). Problems of spatial scale,  in terms of relating this
           activity to ambient concentrations of organic phosphorus, exist. It has been
           suggested that recycling of organic phosphorus to inorganic phosphorus might be
           tightly coupled to organic matter excretion within clusters of  bacteria and
           phytoplankton such that recycling appears to be independent of bulk concentrations
           of either soluble reactive phosphorus or organic phosphorus (Ammerman and
           Azam, 1991). Further  use of such an assay requires more scientific investigation
           and a larger database in relation to changes in nutrient enrichment status of a given
           waterbody.
     Alkaline phosphate is an enzyme present on the outer cell membrane that cleaves the phosphate group off
dissolved organic matter.

                                                             Estuaries and Coastal Waters    41

-------
          Other elements, notably silica, have an impact on the production of specific algal
          groups, i.e., diatoms. The impact of nutrient enrichment and environmental change
          on the relative contribution of diatoms to total phytoplankton production and its
          implications for trophic alterations are discussed above.

          Indicators of Historic Trends

          Patterns observed in monitoring programs in estuaries, coastal waters, and their
          tributaries might be  biased by the relatively brief period of coverage. Changes that
          might or might not be attributed to nutrient enrichment because of their ambiguity
          need to be placed into a context that extends back prior to the intense coastal
          development of the 20th century  and, if possible, prior  to the intense agricultural
          development of the  19th century. Such long-term records of biotic and physical
          conditions within estuarine and coastal waters place nutrient enrichment processes
          in context with natural long term trends and meterological cycles, which might be
          biasing our present view of the situation. Historical  records are  also useful for
          calibrating simulation models prior to  the simulation of nutrient enrichment effects
          and testing management scenarios for  nutrient reduction (Chapra, 1977).

          In a review of historic trends in Chesapeake Bay nutrients, D'Elia suggests that a
          time series of data should encompass  10 cycles in order to distinguish cyclical
          patterns from long-term trends; for a 6-year climatic rainfall cycle, a 60-year
          nutrient loading record would be required (D'Elia, 1982). Though few, there are
          nutrient, suspended sediment and oxygen records that extend over many decades
          through the 20th century and can at least lend weight to the fact that nutrient
          enrichment in coastal waters has  exerted real  impacts on a global scale (Heinle et
          al., 1980; Justic et al., 1987; Walsh  et a!., 1981; Turner and Rabalais, 1991).

          Additional perspective, extending our view centuries into the past, can be  obtained
          from the sediment record. Paleoecological indicators have been analyzed for a
          2,500-year history in Chesapeake Bay (Cooper and Brush,  1993). These indicators
          include pollen, diatom assemblages, total organic carbon, nitrogen, sulfur,  and the
          degree  of pyritization. Pollen and charcoal can be used to date
          deforestation/agricultural events and natural fires/early industrial activity,
          respectively (Brush, 1989). Preserved frustules (silicious, species-specific cell
          walls) of diatoms can  be used to indicate loss of diversity and shifts in the centric-
          to-pennate ratio (c:p).  Centric diatom forms are cylindrical and typify planktonic
          species, whereas pennate forms are oblate and typify benthic species. Increased
          predominance of centric forms indicates shifts from benthic to pelagic primary
          production as would accompany  increased nutrient loading and turbidity (Cooper
          and Brush, 1993). In Chesapeake Bay, there is a dramatic increase in organic
          carbon and in sulfur deposition since the mid 1700s, continuing to the present
          (Cooper and Brush, 1991,  1993). Similarly, the degree  of pyritization, which is the
          ratio of pyritic iron  to pyritic iron plus acid-soluble iron, which varies with the
          oxygen content of bottom waters during deposition  (Raiswell et al, 1988), has also

42     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  increased in the last two centuries of coastal habitation (Cooper and Brush 1991
  1993). Since there is no natural signal during this time frame that can compare
  with the increase in  human activity, the historic record presents  a strong case for
  the impacts that humans can have on the  coastal environment.

  The value of these long-term records is that they corroborate long model runs prior
  to management scenario testing. Additionally, and perhaps most importantly they
  do show a discernible human signal in the environmental  record which puts'a
  magnitude on  the impacts.

  State of the Science—Models

  A discussion of the issues associated with assessing nutrient overenrichment in
  lakes and reservoirs would be incomplete  without addressing the use of water
 quality models. As mentioned in the introduction to the issue papers, numerous
 watershed loading models are available  for the assessment of nutrient
 overenrichment, many of which can  be applied across multiple waterbody types
 A summary is  provided here of some of the receiving water  models  that are
 especially useful for predicting and assessing the eutrophication process in lakes
 and reservoirs. These summaries were prepared  based on  information from the
 revised Compendium of Tools for Watershed Assessment and TMDL Development
 (USEPA, in review).  References pertaining to each of these  models are listed in a
 separate section at the end of this document.

 WASPS. WASPS is  a general-purpose modeling system for  assessing the fate and
 transport of conventional and toxic pollutants in surface waterbodies.  Its EUTRO5
 submodel is designed to address eutrophication processes and has been used in a
 wide range of regulatory and water quality management applications.  The model
 can be applied  to most waterbodies in one, two, or three dimensions  and can be
 used to predict time-varying concentrations of water quality constituents. The
 model reports a set of parameters, including dissolved oxygen concentration,
 carbonaceous biochemical oxygen demand (CBOD), ultimate  BOD, phytoplankton
 carbon and chlorophyll a, total nitrogen, total inorganic nitrogen,  ammonia, nitrate,
 organic nitrogen, total inorganic nitrogen, organic phosphorus, and inorganic
 phosphorus. Although zooplankton dynamics are not simulated in EUTRO5, their
 effect can be described by user-specified forcing functions.  Stoddard et  al. 0995)
 describe a fully three-dimensional application of EUTRO5 in  conjunction with the
 EFDC hydrodynamic model to assess the effectiveness options for the removal of
 total nitrogen from a wastewater treatment  plan.

Tidal Prism Model (TPM). TPM was originally developed as a tool for water
quality management of small coastal basins (Kuo  and Nei!son,1988).   Physical
transport processes are simulated in terms of the concept of tidal flushing.  The
numerical solution scheme implemented for solving the tidal flushing equations is
                                                 Estuaries and Coastal Waters   43

-------
          well suited to application in small coastal basins, including those with a high
          degree of branching. The model allows consideration of shallow embayments
          connected to the primary branches in the basin.  The basic assumptions in the
          model are that the tide rises and falls simultaneously throughout the waterbody and
          that the system is in hydrodynamic equilibrium.   Kinetic formulations in TPM are
          similar to those in CE-QUAL-ICM (Cerco and Cole, 1993), and 23 state variables,
          including total active metal, fecal coliform bacteria, and temperature, can be
          simulated.  TPM includes a sediment submodel, also based on the  sediment
          process model in CE-QUAL-ICM, that considers the depositional flux of
          paniculate organic matter, its diagenesis, and the resulting sediment flux.  TPM
          has been applied to  a number of tidal creeks and coastal embayments in Virginia
          (Kuo and Neilson, 1988).

          CE-QUAL-ICM. CE-QUAL-ICM was developed as the integrated-compartment
          eutrophication model component of the Chesapeake Bay model package (Cerco and
          Cole,  1993).  The model incorporates detailed algorithms for water quality kinetics.
          Interactions among variables are described in 80 partial differential equations that
          employ more than 140 parameters (Cerco and Cole,  1993).  The state variables can
          be categorized into a group and five cycles—the physical group, and the carbon,
          nitrogen, phosphorus, silica, and dissolved oxygen cycles.  An improved finite-
          difference formulation is used to solve  the mass conservation equation for each
          grid cell and for each state variable.  Although the model has been designed for
          application in Chesapeake Bay, it may  be applied to other waterbodies.  One
          limitation is the difficulty of amassing an adequate amount of data for calibration
          and verification. In addition, the model might require  significant technical
          expertise in aquatic  biology and chemistry to be used appropriately.
44     An Overview of Available Enclpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Wetlands
       Wetlands are consistently cited for their value in the control of nonpoint source
       (NFS) pollution through water storage,  flood attenuation, and water quality
       enhancement through uptake and processing of nutrients, sediments, and toxic
       chemicals (see Olson,  1993).  Texts have  been  written on the design, construction,
       and use of wetlands specifically for treatment of waste water and enhancement of '
       water quality (Hammer,  1989; Moshiri,  1993).  Because the purifying capacity of
       wetlands is so often identified as fundamental in their value to society, the
       question might arise: "Is wetland eutrophication a national problem?"  'After all
       wetlands are  most often the first line of defense in protecting receiving waters '
       from the effects of pollution such as excessive nutrients.

       Many authors indicate  that potential impacts to  natural wetlands from  nutrient
      enrichment and pollutant overloads are of  significant concern to researchers and
      resource managers (Olson,  1993; Walbridge, 1993; van der Valk and Jolly  1992-
      Bowden et al.,  1991; Landers and Knuth,  1991; Hammer,  1989; Johnston *1989-'
      Cooper and Gilliam., 1987; Kadlec, 1983). However, scientific understanding of
      wetlands, wetland management, and even wetland classification schemes is still
      evolving, and synthesizing common information about such variable ecosystems on
      a nationwide  scale remains an onerous task (see Nixon and Lee, 1986, Knight,
      1992).  As examples, researchers such as Brinson (1993) Adamus et al. (1987);
      and Kent et al. (1992) discuss classification and monitoring strategies for wetlands
      and others, such as Howard-Williams (1985) and Johnston (1991) discuss nutrient'
      dynamics in various wetlands.  However, in the  literature  reviewed, no examples  of
      a standardized strategy  to assess or manage nutrient overenrichment  in the interest
      of wetland "health"  were found.

      The purpose of this  working document is to stimulate thought and discussion
      regarding how to assess and manage nutrient overenrichment in wetlands. The
      literature reviewed and  cited does  not reflect a comprehensive examination of
      relevant research in  wetlands, but has been selected to highlight particular issues.

      This discussion restricts the definition of "wetlands" to those lands which are
      transitional between terrestrial and aquatic systems (for example, shallow,
      vegetated tidal and nontidal wetland communities, either separate from  or adjacent
      to stream, river, lake, and coastal waterbodies).  Benthic wetland communities,
      such as submerged aquatic vegetation located within streams or rivers, or seagrass
      beds in nearshore coastal environs, have been implicitly excluded because they are
      part of receiving waters addressed  in other  sections of this overview.
                                                                     Wetlands     45

-------
           Background

           Nationally, natural wetlands continue to experience reduction in abundance and
           distribution. Approximately half of the  wetlands in the continental United States
           have been lost since colonial settlement (Prayer et al., 1983). Although wetland
           modification has slowed significantly since the 1950s, wetland losses from
           dredging, filling and land development  have continued.  National policy instituting
           a "no net loss" of wetlands was adopted in the mid-1980s in an attempt to reverse
           the negative trend.

           In July 1990 the USEPA developed national guidance for wetland water quality
           standards to be  established during fiscal years 1991-1993.  The guidance was
           developed to ensure that provisions of the  Clean Water Act (CWA) applied to
           other surface waters were also applied to wetlands.  States were required to include
           wetlands  in their definition of "State Waters," as well as to  adopt narrative and
           numeric criteria and antidegradation policies for wetland protection (USEPA,
           1990). Constructed wetlands, for the specific purpose of wastewater treatment,  are
           excluded  from protection; however, the knowledge gained from the processes
           within these wetlands might contribute  to developing endpoints or standards
           elsewhere.  Currently, the standards for wetlands are primarily narrative criteria
           developed by  states, because it has been difficult to apply certain numeric criteria
           to wetlands. For example, dissolved oxygen is hard to standardize because a
           wetland can be  dry and have zero dissolved oxygen.  Enforcement and setting of
           permit limits are based on  fixed numbers,  but for wetlands the limits  might be
           based on  concentrations  related to flow or  perhaps load-based measures.

           On June  10-11, 1991, EPA sponsored a workshop to define scientific and policy
           issues concerning wetland  quality and nonpoint source (NPS) pollution, and to
           evaluate the role of created and natural  wetlands in control of rural NPS pollution
           (Olson, 1993).  General findings  of the  workshop identified several key points.
           Since eutrophication can be considered  a subset of NPS pollution, the following
           findings and issues provide a basis for further consideration in development of a
           national nutrient assessment strategy:

           Natural wetlands should not be used as wastewater treatment systems. In most
           cases, natural wetlands are considered  waters of the United States and thus are
           entitled to protection under the CWA. Natural wetlands,  while providing NPS
           pollution  control service, should not have NPS pollutants intentionally diverted into
           them.  Furthermore, natural wetlands that may be in threat of significant
           community changes should be protected from NPS sources through the use of
           BMPs or  vegetated buffer strips.  Several researchers echo this concern.  Hammer
           (1989) and van  der Valk and Jolly (1992)  also recommend that natural wetlands be
           avoided when trying to address excessive nutrient  loadings.   Natural wetlands are
           not particularly  effective as nutrient sinks,  but clearly perform a valuable function
           in attenuating diffuse runoff (Howard-Williams, 1985).  Johnston (1991)  identified

46     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
  wetlands designed for pollutant filtration as having a much greater assimilative
  capacity and range compared to natural wetlands.

  Wetlands must be part of an integral landscape approach to NPS control.
  Created, restored or natural wetlands can  contribute to this strategy, but must be
  sited appropriately,  so they are not overloaded.  Attempts  have been made in
  developing guidelines  for certain aspects of wetlands as pollutant filters, including
  wetland siting within a watershed or landscape unit.  However, certain technical
  issues, such as fate and effects of contaminants and development of design and site
  selection criteria, are in need of resolution  before siting and using restored
  wetlands for NFS pollution control (van der Valk and JoHy, 1992).

  Knowledge of technical issues is uneven. This point was also made by Nixon and
  Lee (1986).  Having performed an extensive review of wetlands and water quality,
  they state that information  on wetlands nationwide is  unevenly distributed, and
  there  is a need to learn a great deal more about wetland processes and functions
 before the scientific community can generalize the overall role of wetlands in
 water quality. Current knowledge of nutrient dynamics (and other parameters)
 varies by wetland type and region. These factors are  important considerations
 since they might indicate that a regional or  ecoregional strategy might be more
 effective for nutrient assessment than a single, national strategy.

 Technical and scientific issues will not be as difficult to resolve compared to social
 and economic ones, largely because administrative boundaries rarely coincide with
 the logical management units of watersheds. This issue is particularly challenging
 for environmental managers in developing cooperative agreements with other
 administrations sharing the  same watershed(s).  The changes observed in wetlands
 from nutrient enrichment are likely to be more subtle and over a longer term
 compared to  receiving waters, such as lakes and reservoirs.  Public use values for
 receiving waters, such as drinking water, fishing, and swimming, have been well
 developed for most areas.  Conversely,  social, and in particular, economic use
 values might not be as well developed or expressed for specific wetlands in some
 regions. In general, large uncertainties  remain  in the economic evaluation of
 wetlands (Costanza et al., 1989).

 For this discussion, additional policy issues/questions to consider include the
 following:

 •  Eutrophication needs to be defined according to whether it is natural or
   human-induced.
•  At what point is eutrophication  in a wetland  system considered a "bad" thing,
   and what standards will be used for comparison?
•  Decisions and value judgments are needed to determine whether a given system
   should be controlled or allowed to follow the change (even if that change is
   human-induced).

                                                                Wetlands     47

-------
          State of the Science—Endpoints

          Knowledge of wetlands has increased significantly over the last 20 years. The
          scientific literature describes studies of nutrient dynamics, uptake capacity of soils
          and wetland types, examples of using wetlands to ameliorate nutrients from
          agricultural or nonpoint source pollution, and discussions of wetland values (for
          example, Gilliam, 1994; Detenbeck et a!., 1993; Phillips et al., 1993;  Baker, 1992;
          Knight, 1992; Masscheleyn et al., 1992; Mitsch et al.,  1991; Costanza et al., 1989;
          German, 1989; Kuenzler, 1989; Reddy et al., 1989; Kemp et al., 1985; Rhodes et
          al., 1985; Johnston et al., 1984).  A common finding in much of the literature
          reviewed is that natural wetlands have many dynamic variables.  For  nutrients,
          various input sources, such as surface, atmosphere, runoff,  and groundwater make
          it difficult  to generalize about their effect on wetland quality (Johnston, 1991;
          Leibowitz and Brown, 1990; Nixon and Lee, 1986).

          The use of restored or constructed wetlands specifically for nutrient retention (i.e.,
          sewage treatment) and water quality enhancement has been extensively studied and
          has emerged as a discipline within wetland science (see Moshiri, 1993; Mitsch,
          1992b;  Hammer, 1989).  Consequently, findings from work with engineered
          wetlands are likely to be useful in determining some measurement parameters and
          appropriate endpoints.  However, compared to many natural wetlands,  constructed
          wetlands are often much less diverse in biological and physical characteristics,
          compared to many natural wetlands.

          A potentially important consideration in assessing  nutrient conditions in wetlands
          on a broad scale, such as a watershed or ecoregional level, might involve revisiting
          wetland classification with nutrient dynamics in mind.  The Cowardin et al. (1979)
          hierarchical system of wetland classification is based largely on plant  species
          composition.  Although this classification has been useful for inventorying
          wetlands nationally, uptake by plants is only one  pathway for nutrients.
          Alternatively, Brinson  (1993) developed a wetland classification system that
          grouped characteristics more by hydrogeomorphic processes. Figure 2 depicts
          nutrient availability as a core factor with hydrologic energy and hydroperiod.
          Biological  attributes, such as wetland species composition,  are then used to refine
          wetland classification.  Such a general classification approach might be useful in
          organizing wetlands specifically for nutrient management.
48     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
                                    CORE FACTORS
                           RIVERINE
.FRINGE
                                                    BASIN
  Figure 2. Relationship of core hydrogeomorphic factors (note nutrient availability) to
  charactnze various wetland types.  Modified from Brinson (1993).

  Nutrients in Wetlands

  Nutrient retention and release kinetics are highly site-specific, and uptake
  mechanisms and differ among wetland types, soils, water levels, seasons and other
  parameters (Phillips et a]., 1993; Johnston, 1991; Kemp et al.,  1985). Factors
 contributing to variable nutrient uptake in wetlands include:

 •  Source. Wetlands can  receive nutrients from agricultural, rural or urbanizing
    environments, which deliver varying concentrations. Sources  might be specific
    points or a cumulative  contribution  from nonpoint sources, or both.  Nutrients
    are carried by inputs from streams,  rivers, tidal exchanges, groundwater,
    precipitation, or atmospheric deposition.

 •   Physical Factors.  Latitude, climate, hydrology, and soil type are among the
    physical attributes that  affect wetland size, structure, and, consequently, nutrient
    dynamics.

 •   Chemical Factors.  pH,  organic matter,  substrate characteristics,
    nitrification/denitrification, and reduction/oxidation potential all affect nutrient
   cycling and availability.

 •  Biological Factors. Plant, animal, and microbial ecology all contribute to
   nutrient dynamics-and pathways within wetlands.  Aside from sediment often
   serving as a sink  for phosphorus, biological components serve as significant
   nutrient storages and processors in wetlands. The availability of biological
   processes depends greatly on source, physical, and chemical factors.

Several other authors have identified hydrology within  wetlands as critical, but
understanding of nutrient dynamics is lacking (Gilliam, 1994; Brinson, 1993;
Johnston, 1991; Clausen and Johnson, 1990).  The highly transient hydrology of
many wetlands makes evaluating long-term nutrient and sediment removal difficult.
However, in spite of the range of variables and currently unknown factors of
                                                                 Wetlands
                                      49

-------
           nutrient dynamics  in wetlands, some ecological consequences of eutrophication
           have been identified and measured,  Kadlec (1983) identified certain conditions
           resulting from nutrient overenrichment through effluent discharge: the death and
           uprooting of trees, exotic plant invasion, and presence of specific fungi and
           bacteria. While nitrogen was consistently reduced over 8 years of study,
           phosphorus eventually overloaded the system. Wetland recovery was documented
           after cessation of the effluent discharge.

           In detailed literature reviews, Johnston (1989) and Howard-Williams (1985)
           identify several factors in which  nutrient overenrichment likely  affects wetland
           quality:

           •  Changes  in plant species composition. Eutrophication  may alter plant  species
             dominance in a  wetland, affecting factors such as long-term nutrient assimilative
             capacity or foraging habits by wildlife. Changes in trophic status may favor
             invasion by exotic plants, which might outcompete native species for space and
             resources  (see Kadlec, 1983).  Also, changes in species composition might
             ultimately affect a wetland's ability to take up other pollutants.

           •  Reduced  photosynthesis.  A reduction in photosynthesis is a reduction in
             primary productivity and, consequently, nutrient uptake  and processing.

           •  Interference with feeding and nutrition of aquatic plants and animals. In
             shallow-water wetland systems with long residence times, eutrophic conditions
             might cause phytoplankton and macroalgal blooms or development of epiphytes,
             which might interfere with the growth and productivity of wetland plants and
             microbes.

           The majority of research specifically addressing nutrient dynamics in wetlands
           measures concentrations and pathways of either nitrogen or phosphorus, and
           deposition of sediment, litter, or other input. Specific techniques for measuring
           nutrient flows or storage (e.g., soils, plants, detritus) in wetlands appear to be well
           developed (see van der Valk et al., 1991; Johnston, 1991; Chambers et al.,  1992).
           However, no examples were found that specifically recommend limits or thresholds
           of nutrients or sediment for a particular type of wetland.

Of the literature reviewed, Johnston (1991) comes closest in designing a table-type matrix to
consider a range of nutrient parameters affecting wetland quality (Table 4). Johnston's
review focused on wetland effects on the quality of surface water entering  ecosystems
downstream, and not directly  on wetland "health." Nevertheless, the approach to examining
the literature for various means and ranges of nutrients in wetlands is useful, and an updated
literature review targeted specifically for wetland quality could provide insight into
organization of wetlands by region or type.
50     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Table 4.  Matrix considering a range of nutrient parameters affecting wetland quality.
Wetlands Name
Reedy Cr. Wetland. 1979
Reedy Cr. Wetland. 1980
Reedy Cr. Wetland, 1981
Reedy Cr. Wetland. 1982
Reedy Cr. Wetland, 1983
Reedy Cr. Wetland, 1984
Reedy Cr Wetland, 1985
Thuja peatland, 1976
Thuja peatland, 1977
Thuja peatland, 1978
Thuja peatland, 1979
Thuja peatland, 1980
Thuja peatland, 1981
Thuja peailand, 1982
Thuja peatland, 1983
Fresh marsh, enriched
Water hyacinth marsh
Boggy Gut Wetland
Cattail march
Nevin Wetland
Mixed hardwood swamp
Cypress Dome
Cypress-Tupelo Swamp
Tupelo Swamp
Arithmetic Mean
Wetland
Type
Swamp
Swamp
Swamp
Swarnp
Swamp
Swamp
Swamp
Bog
Bog
Bog
Bog
Bog
Bog
Bog
Bog
Marsh
Marsh
Marsh
Marsh
Marsh
Swamp
Swamp
Swamp
Swamp
Enriched
with
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
.
.
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Sewage
Hatchery
Sewage
Sewage
Drainage
Nutrients
Location
Orlando
Orlando
Orlando
Orlando
Orlando
Orlando
Orlando
Bellaire
Beliaire
Bellaire
Bellaire
Bellaire
Bellaire
Bellaire
Bellaire
Clennont
Gnsville.
H. Head
Bnllion
Madison
Wtdlwood
Gnsville.
Barataria
Tar River
St
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
Ml
Ml
MI
Ml
MI
MI
MI
Ml
FL
FL
SC
Wl
WI
FL
FL
LA
NC

Total N
53.2
75.5
74.9
71.0
72.6
57.5
61.7
1.84
6.75
9.63
6.21
9.07
4.46
0.76
-
-
.
44.9
-
15.0
-
11. 1
3.8
-
10.34
71%
84%
95%
87%
77%
76%
77%
75%
80%
80%
77%
75%
81%
61%
-
-
-
83%
.
21%

74%
26%
-
64%
Tola! P
-19.4
-19.2
5.72
-11.6
-17.0
-2.7 1
-2.35
1.07
3.01
1.58
1.47
1.46
-0.33
-0.04
-0.03
37.1
7.7
12.1
4.8
0.11
0.79
10.4
1.69
25.1
-
-103%
-80%
23%
-52%
-171%
-30%
-28%
91%
88%
72%
64%
65%
-27%
-2%
-1%
98%
16%
62%
68%
7%
87%
92%
41%
57%

                                                                                 Wetlands
51

-------
          Currently, the more common techniques for assessing nutrient conditions in
          wetlands come from development of evaluation indicators of ecological stress and
          design and engineering of  wetlands for water quality enhancement.  In particular,
          Leibowitz and Brown (1990),  Mitsch (I992b), Mendelssohn and McKee (1992),
          and Kent et al. (1992) have identified indicators specifically for wetlands. The
          techniques identified are designed to evaluate multiple stressors, but include
          nutrients.

          Measurement parameters to be considered for wetlands include the following:

          Nitrogen Species Concentrations. Atnmonium-N, nitrite-N, and nitrate-N  can all
          be sampled using standardized collection and analytical methods. Sources of N are
          the water column, wetland  detritus, litter and  peat, and standing stock of plant
          biomass.  A challenge in considering any nutrient concentration in the context of
          developing endpoints is the uptake range and variability among wetlands.
          Examples of the variability found in nitrogen uptake  in wetlands include German
          (1989), who found a 36 percent removal rate  of N from an undeveloped Florida
          wetland, and Rhodes et al.  (1985), who  documented a 99 percent removal
          efficiency of riparian forests.

          Phosphorous Species Concentrations. Total inorganic phosphorous and total
          organic phosphorous. Sources are sediment, litter/detritus, microbes, and standing
          stock biomass.  Ranges of P concentrations and uptake are also large depending on
          wetland type.  As examples,  Mitsch (I992a)  found phosphorous retention  capacity
          of natural wetlands  to be 4 to 10 percent efficient, compared to 63 to 96 percent in
          constructed wetlands. Masscheleyn et al. (1992) compared phosphorous
          assimilation and release of  a bottomland hardwood swamp soil with that of a
          freshwater marsh and found that the swamp forest soil displayed greater sorption
          capability.  Cooper  and Gilliam (1987) estimated that 50 percent of P was  removed
          by runoff from agricultural fields in North Carolina. Chescheir et al. (1991) found
          that small pumping  events of agricultural drainage water into wetlands retained
          substantial phosphorus concentrations, but that large events documented increased
          phosphorus concentrations leaving the wetland.

          Nitrogen:Phosphorus Ratio. The N:P  ratio indicates relative concentration  of  N
          and P and aids in determining nutrient availability or limitation within a system.
          N:P ratios are used  in assessing marine and aquatic systems. Given the variability
          of nutrient limitation within various wetlands, the N:P ratio could be a useful
          endpoint for comparing impacted wetlands to reference conditions.

          Dissolved Oxygen Concentration.  The dissolved oxygen (DO) concentration
          could be used as a eutrophication indicator in wetlands with extended
          hydroperiods.
52     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Processes as Measurement Parameters

 Hydrology and Hydroperiod. Hydrology within wetlands is a critical determinant
 of wetland condition and nutrient dynamics, but more research is needed to
 understand hydrological mechanisms in wetlands (Gilliam, 1994; Johnston, 1991;
 Clausen and Johnson, 1990).  The highly transient hydrology of'many wetlands  '
 makes evaluating long-term nutrient and sediment removal difficult.  Clausen and
 Johnson (1990) determined that lake-level hydrology  significantly influenced the
 fluctuation of nutrients and total suspended solids into and out of an adjacent
 wetland. Dye tracer studies used  to examine water velocity through a wetland
 found rates to be highly variable;  lower velocities resulted in greater residence time
 and greater pollutant removal (Chescheir et al., 1991b).  Phillips et al. (1993)
 determined that the effect of forested wetlands on water quality depends largely on
 hydrologic conditions. Also, changes in hydroperiod can have significant effects  on
 nutrient pathways and cycling rates, as well as plant species composition
 (Leibowitz and Brown, 1990; Mitsch, 1992; Brinson,  1993).

 Organic Matter and Sediment Accretion. Sediment accretion refers to the
 accumulation of both mineral  and organic matter in wetlands and provides a good
 indication  of trophic status (Leibowitz and Brown, 1990).  Cooper and Gilliam
 (1987) demonstrated that areas between field edges and perennial streams served as
 sinks for sediment and phosphorus from the continual runoff deposition.

 Nutrient Uptake and Mass Balance.  Mass balance measures the difference
 between nutrient  input and output  of a system and assigns the difference as uptake
 by biologiccal, chemical, or physical processes. There are many examples of
 measuring   nutrient uptake in applied wetland research.  Kemp et al. (1985)
 conducted  field and laboratory studies to determine decomposition rates and
 nutrient flux in a Louisiana swamp forest.  Twenty-six percent N and 40 percent  P
 were retained by  the swamp, mainly  from the settlement of paniculate matter,  and
 these percentages indicate that the  swamp  is a long-term sink for N and P via
 burial of decomposed organic matter and denitrification.  However, direct
 measurement of nutrient cycling is difficult in systems that lack the clearly defined
 input/output points necessary for mass balance equations or nutrient fluxes  between
 storage compartments (Leibowitz and Brown, 1990; Johnston, 1991). As a potential
 assessment endpoint, Kent et al. (1992) present nutrient uptake and metabolism as
 a component in a functional value  index for monitoring wetlands.  In combination
 with other  metrics of the index, net loss of N or P from a monitored wetland is
compared to reference wetland conditions.

Nitrification/Denitrification.  Nitrification is a biological process by which
atmospheric N is  fixed into inorganic N compounds available for biological
assimilation. Denitrification is a reverse process by which nitrate is chemically
converted into gas and dissipated into atmospheric N.  Since many wetlands are
nitrogen-limited,  this might be a critical measurement parameter to determine a

                                                               Wetlands     53

-------
          wetland's capacity to handle nitrogen (Hansen et al, 1994),  Reddy et al. (1989)
          have successfully quantified nitrification-denitrification at the plant root-sediment
          interface in wetland plants.

          Biological/Ecological Parameters

          Use of Indicator Species to Determine a Nutrient-related Condition.  The
          presence or absence of certain plants, animals, or microbes might be useful in
          flagging a potentially changing wetland trophic condition.  Often, invasive exotic
          plants might serve as early  indicators of elevated nutrient concentrations.

          Abundance, Diversity and Species Composition.   Wetland plants are reliable
          indicators of stress, such  as eutrophication, and hydrologic condition, and sampling
          methods are well developed (Leibowitz and Brown,  1990).  Marked changes in
          species richness and composition of plants might indicate an accelerated change
          resulting from nutrient enrichment.  A change in successional status of a wetland
          might be included as part of measuring changes in species richness.  However,
          plant community succession might occur in combination  with other factors, such as
          sedimentation and changes  in hydrology or competition for space (Odum, 1971).

          Peak Biomass or Net Primary Productivity.  Overall net primary productivity  of
          a wetland can indicate "health" and  a relative stage of succession (Mitsch, 1992).
          Although nutrients often  stimulate plant growth and production, this factor, used in
          conjunction with plant species diversity, might indicate a change in trophic status
          resulting from nutrient enrichment.

          Leaf Area, Solar Transmittance and Greenness.  Changes in characteristics of
          wetland canopy plant species might  also be an indicator of eutrophic conditions
          (Leibowitz and Brown,,  1990). If positively correlated,  then remote sensing
          techniques might be useful  in assessing large wetland areas. Nutrient flux has
          been examined  at the landscape level using remote sensing and GIS tools (Correll
          et al., 1992).

          Aquatic Microbial Community Structure.  Microbial communities are linked to
          nutrient cycling and litter decomposition (Leibowitz  and Brown, 1990).

          State of the Science—Wetland Monitoring and Assessment

          Of the literature reviewed, several authors  provide detailed discussions of
          monitoring wetlands (Kent  et al, 1992; Adamus, 1992; Leibowitz and Brown,
          1990).  Assessment of nutrients is generally  included as a component in monitoring
          programs, but is often combined with other metrics to assess general conditions.
          Consequently, the focus is often qualitative and therefore  lacks the precision
          needed to clearly assess nutrient impacts.  Landers and Knuth  (1991) found that
54     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 wetland monitoring to determine the impact of nutrients on lakes in LJSEPA
 Region 5 was lacking.  Nixon and Lee (1986) recommend that a combination of
 carefully selected field studies, with establishment of microcosm studies, serve as
 the basis for monitoring and increased understanding of wetland functions.

 Various approaches to field monitoring were identified by:

       •  Geographic region
       •  Wetland type
       •  Accessibility and ease of study (for cost-effectiveness)
       •  Size and visibility (enlisting public interest and support)
       •  Availability of supporting information (building on previous research)

The use of reference wetlands or conditions is an  important consideration  in
assessing impacts. Establishing a series of reference wetlands to serve as  a
database within a region would allow  comparison for a range of parameters (Figure
3).  For example, a parameter (such as nutrient load) for wetlands undergoing
assessment could be compared to those reference conditions  having a "normal"
range. Assessed wetlands falling outside the normal range may  be considered
impaired for that  specific parameter.

Within EPA, the  STORET database has some limited information on wetlands.  In
particular, Michigan and Florida have  wetland sampling stations, but Michigan
contains fish tissue data only.  Florida has sampling information on wetlands,
including nutrient concentrations (Figure 4).  However, the distribution of  sampling
stations emphasizes the uneven spatial coverage on a national scale.
                                                                Wetlands     55

-------
           Figure 3. Hypothetical example of how a national or regional database of
           reference wetlands could be used to assess nutrient impacts.  "Wetland Type 1, 2,
           3 & 4" refers to different hypothetical wetland classifications that display a  range
           of "normal" characteristics for a given parameter. The parallel lines bordering the
           wetland types represent hypothetical confidence intervals for a "normal" response.
           Driving functions (X axis) and response variables (Y axis) can represent single or
           multiple variables.  Assessed wetlands for a given variable  falling outside a
           "normal" range would  indicate a potentially impaired condition.
56
An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
Figure 4.  Distribution of sampling stations in the USEPA STORET database that are
wetlands.  The figure emphasizes the sparse national distribution of wetlands data.

Models that compute or predict nutrient loadings to wetlands (transport models for
groundwater or surface water flow)  are well developed and have been reasonably
successful.   Assessment of inputs/loadings using a variety of loading models (such
as SWMM and HSPF) can be used  to predict nutrient and sediment loads to
wetlands.  Loadings  can also be estimated from local monitoring studies.  As a
general class, models that are capable of predicting wetland responses to nutrient
loads are  not well developed.  However, some traditional water  quality models,
such as CEQUAL-W2, and WASPS, have been used for evaluating wetlands and
hydrodynamic models, such as EFDC, are being applied to wetlands in Florida to
assess hydrologic response (Hamrick, Virginia Institute of Marine Science,
personal communication).

Summary

Because of the high degree of variability between and within wetlands, it is
possible that a regional strategy for  wetlands is a more prudent course than a
detailed national strategys.  Additionally, it is clear that more research is needed to
understand the specific mechanisms  that affect wetland quality.  These research
needs include the following:

       •  Additional  monitoring and improved documentation of the effects of
          nutrient overenrichment on various wetland types.  This may involve (1)
          synthesis and organization of wetland research to determine whether
          certain parameters have sufficient data for developing  assessment
                                                               Wetlands     57

-------
                    endpoints for various wetland types, and (2) development of a regional
                    or national database for wetland reference conditions.

                    Specific assessment methods for process-based parameters, such as
                    nutrient fluxes between storages in wetlands.

                    Improved modeling techniques for predicting nutrient uptake and
                    dynamics and the responses of wetlands to these processes.
58     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
                                References

 Introduction

 Heiskary, S.A. 1989. Lake Protection Through Standards:  A State's Viewpoint. In
 Water Quality Standards for (he 21st Century Proceedings of a National
 Conference. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Water. Washington
 D.C. p. 117-121.

 Ingman, G.L.  1992. A  rationale and altenatives for controlling nutrients and
 eutrophication problems in the Clark Fork River Basin.  State of Montanta.
 Department of Health and Environmental Sciences.  Water Quality Bureau.

 North American Lake Management Society.  1992. Developing Eutrophication
 Standards for Lakes and Reservoirs.  A Report Prepared by the Lake Standards
 Subcommittee, May 1992. NALMS, Alachua, Florida.

 USEPA.  1992.  Compendium of watershed-scale Models for TMDL Development.
 EPA841-R-92-002.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. In review.  Compendium of Tools  for Watershed Assessment  and TMDL
 Development.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. 1994. National  Water Quality Inventory. 1992 Report to Congress.  EPA
 841-R-94-001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 Watershed Loading Models

 Addiscott, T. M., and R. J. Wagenet.  1985.  Concepts of solute leaching in  soils:
 A review of modeling approaches. Journal of Soil Science  36: 411-424.

 Arnold, J.G., B.A. Engel, and R. Srinivasan.  1993. A continuous time, grid cell
 watershed  model. In: Proceedings of Application of Advanced Information
 Technologies for the Management of Natural Resources. Sponsored by AS AE, June
 17-19, 1993, Spokane, Washington.

Arnold, J.G., J.R. Williams, A.D. Nicks, and N.B. Sammons.  1989. SWRRB, a
basin scale simulation model for soil and water resources management.  Texas
A&M Press.
                                                             Reierences    59

-------
          Ball, I.E., MJ. White, G. de R, Innes, and L. Chen. 1993. Application of HSPF on
          the Upper Nepean Catchment. In Proceedings of Hydrology and Water Resources
          Symposium. Newcastle, New South Wales, Australia. June 30- July 2, 1993, pp
          343-348.

          Beasley, D.B. 1986. Distributed parameter hydrologic and water quality modeling.
          Agricultural Nonpoint Source Pollution: Model Selection  and Application, ed.
          Giorgini and F. Zingales. pp. 345-362.

          Bicknell, B. R., J. C. Imhoff, J.  L. Kittle,  A. S. Donigian, and R. C. Johanson.
          1993. Hydrological Simulation Program - FORTRAN (HSPF): User's manual for
          release  10.0. Environmental Research Laboratory, U.S.  Environmental Protection
          Agency, Athens, GA. EPA 600/3-84-066.

          Bouraoui, F., T.A. Dillaha, and S. Mostaghimi. 1993. ANSWERS 2000: Watershed
          model for sediment and nutrient transport. ASAE Paper No. 93-2079. American
          Society  of Agricultural Engineers, St. Joseph, MI.

          Brabets, T.P. 1986. Quantity and quality of urban runoff from the Chester Creek
          Basin, Anchorage, Alaska. Water Resources Investigations Report 86-4312. U. S.
          Geological Survey. Denver, CO.

          Camp, Dresser, and McKee (CDM). 1992.  Watershed Management Model user's
          manual, version 2.0. Prepared for the Florida Department  of Environmental
          Regulation, Tallahassee,  FL.

          Dillaha, T.A. 1992.  Nonpoint source modelling for evaluating the effectiveness of
          best management practices.  NWQEP Notes 52(March):5-7.

          Donigian, A.S. Jr., B.R. Bicknell, L.C. Linker, J. Hannawald, C. Chang, and R.
          Reynolds. 1990. Chesapeake Bay Program Watershed Model application to
          calculate bay nutrient loadings:  Preliminary Phase I findings and
          recommendations. Prepared by AQUA TERRA consultants for the U. S.
          Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD.

          Donigian, A.S., and W.C. Huber.  1991.  Modeling of nonpoint source water
          quality in urban and non-urban areas. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
          EPA/600/3-91/039.

          Donigian, A.S. Jr., and A.S. Patwardhan.  1992. Modeling  nutrient loadings from
          croplands in the Chesapeake Bay Watershed. In Proceedings of Water Resources
          sessions at Water Forum  '92. Baltimore, Maryland. August 2-6,  1992. pp. 817-822.

          Engel, B.A., R. Srinivasan, and C. Rewerts. 1993. Modeling erosion and surface
          water quality. In Geographic Information Systems: Proceedings of the Seventh

60     An Overview  of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Annual GRASS Users Conference. National Park Service Technical Report
 NPS/NRGISD/NRTR-93/13. Lakewood, Colorado, March 16-19, 1992,

 Federal Highway Administration, 1990.  Pollutant loadings and impacts from
 highway stormwater runoff. Research, Development, and Technology.  U.S.
 Department of Transportation, McLean, VA.

 Guay. J.R. 1990. Simulation of urban runoff and river water quality in the San
 Joaquin River near Fresno, California. In Symposium Proceedings on Urban
 Hydrology. American Water Resources Association, Denver, Colorado, November
 4-8,  1990, pp. 177-182.

 Haith, D.A., and L.L. Shoemaker. 1987. Generalized watershed loading functions
 for stream flow nutrients.  Water Resources Bulletin 107(EEI):121-137.

 Haith, D.A.,  R. Mandel, and R.S. Wu. 1992. GWLF - Generalized Watershed
 Loading Functions, Version 2.0 - User's manual. Department of Agricultural
 Engineering, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY.

 Huber, W.C. and R.E. Dickinson. 1988. Storm Water Management Model Version
 4, User's manual.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA. EPA/600/
 3-88/00la (NTIS PB88-23664I/AS).

 Lindner-Lunsford, J.B., and S.R. Ellis. 1987. Comparison of conceptually based
 and regression rainfall-runoff models, Denver Metropolitan Area, Colorado, and
 potential applications in urban areas. Water Resources Investigations Report 87-
 4104. U. S. Geological Survey. Denver, CO.

 Lumb, A.M., J.L. Kittle, and K.M. Flynn. 1990.  Users manual for ANNIE, A
 computer program for interactive hydrologic analyses and data management.
 Water Resources Investigations Report 89-4080.  U.S. Geological Survey  Reston
 VA.

 Lumb, A.M., and J.L. Kittle. 1993. Expert System for calibration and application
 of watershed models. In Proceedings of the Federal Interagency Workshop on
 Hydrologic Modeling Demands for the 90's. U. S. Geological  Survey Water
 Resources Investigation Report 93-4018. Fort Collins, Colorado, June 6-9, 1993.

 McElroy,  A.D., S.W. Chiu, J.W.  Nabgen, A. Aleti, R.W. Bennett. 1976. Loading
functions for assessment of water pollution for non-point sources. U.S.
 Environmental Protection Agency.  EPA 600/2-76/151 (NTIS PB-253325).

 Mills, W.B. 1985.  Water quality assessment: A  screening procedure for toxic and
 conventional pollutants in surface and ground water. Part 1.  Environmental
                                                              References    61

-------
          Research Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA,
          EPA/600/6-85/002a.

          Moore, L.W., C. Y. Chew, R.H, Smith, and S. Sahoo.  1992, Modeling of Best
          Management Practices on North Reeifoot Creek, Tennessee. Water Environment
          Research 64(3):241-247.

          Needham, S.E. and R.A. Young. 1993. ANN-AGNPS:  A continuous simulation
          watershed model. In Proceedings of the Federal Interagency Workshop on
          Hydrologic Modeling Demands for the 90's.  U. S. Geological Survey Water
          Resources Investigation Report 93-4018. Fort Collins, Colorado, June 6-9, 1993.

          Nix, J.S.  1991. Applying urban runoff models. Water Environment and
          Technology, June 1991.

          Omicron  Associates. 1990. Nonpoint Pollution Source Model for Analysis and
          Planning (NPSMAP) - Users manual.  Omicron Associates, Portland, OR.

          Palmstrom, N., and W.W. Walker, Jr. 1990. P8 urban catchment model: User's
          guide, Program documentation, and evaluation of existing models, design concepts,
          and Hunt-Potowomut data inventory. The Narragansett Bay Project Report No.
          NBP-90-50.

          Pantalion, J., A. Scharlach, and G. Oswald.  1995. Water quality master planning in
          an urban  watershed. Watershed Management: Planning for the 21st Century.
          Proceedings of the ASCE's First International Conference of Water Resources
          Engineering, held in San Antonio, TX, August 14-16, 1995.  pp.330-339.

          Panuska,  J.C., I.D. Moore, and L.A. Kramer.  1991.  Terrain analysis: Integration
          into the agricultural nonpoint source (AGNPS) pollution model. Journal of Soil
          and Water Conservation 46(1): 59-64.

          Scheckenberger, R.B., and A.S. Kennedy. 1994. The use of HSPF in subwatershed
          planning. In Current practices in modelling the management of stormwater
          impacts. W. James (ed). Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL. p.  175-187.

          Schueler, T. 1987.  Controlling urban runoff:  A practical manual for planning
          and designing urban BMPs.  Metropolitan Washington  Council of Governments,
          Washington, DC.

          Srinivasan, R., and J.G. Arnold. 1994. Integration of a basin-scale  water quality
          model with GIS. Water Resources Bulletin 30(3):453-462.
62     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Tasker, G.D., and N.E. Driver.  1988.  Nationwide regression models for predicting
 urban runoff water quality at unmonitored sites.  Water Resources Bulletin
 24(5):1Q91-1101.

 Terstriep, M. L., M. T. Lee, E, P. Mills, A. V. Greene, and M. R. Rahman. 1990.
 Simulation of urban runoff and pollutant loading from the greater Lake Calumet
 area. Prepared by the Illinois State Water Survey for the U.S. Environmental
 Protection Agency, Region V,  Water Division, Watershed Management Unit,
 Chicago, IL.

 Tim, U.S., and R. Jolly. 1994. Evaluating agricultural nonpoint-source pollution
 using integrated geographic information systems and hydrologic/water quality
 model.  Journal of Environmental Quality 23:25-35.

 USEPA.  1992.  TMDL Case Study #4; Nomini  Creek Watershed. TMDL Case
 Study Series. EPA841-F-93-004. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office
 of Water, Washington, D.C.

 Vieux, B.E.,  and S. Needham.  1993. Nonpoint-pollution model sensitivity to grid-
 cell  size. Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management  119(2):I41-157.

 Walker, J. F., S. A. Pickard, and W. C. Sonzogni.  1989. Spreadsheet watershed
 modeling for nonpoint-source pollution management in a Wisconsin basin. Water
 Resources Bulletin 25(1): 139-147.

 Young,  R.A., C.A. Onstad, D.D. Bosch, and W.P. Anderson. 1989.  AGNPS: A
 nonpoint-source pollution model  for evaluating agriculture  watersheds. Journal  of
 Soil  and Water Conservation 44:168-173.

 Lakes and Reservoirs

 Boynton, W.R., W.M. Kemp and C.W.  Keefe  1982. A comparative analysis of
 nutrients and  other factors influencing estuarine phytoplankton production. In V.S.
 Kennedy (ed.) Estuarine Comparisons, Academic  Press, New York, pp. 69-90.

 Carlson, R.E. 1980. More complications in the chlorophyll-Secchi disk relationship.
Limnology and Oceanography.  25:378-382.

Carlson, R.E. 1984. The trophic state concept:  a lake management perspective.  In
Lake and Reservoir Management: Proceedings of the Third Annual Conference  of
the North American Lake Management Society. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency. EPA'440/5/84-001.
                                                              References    63

-------
          Chiaudani, G. and M. Vighi.  1974. The N:P ratio and tests with Selenastrum to
          predict eutrophication in lakes. Water Research.  8; 1063-0169.

          Cooke, G.D.  and R.E. Carlson. Water quality management in a drinking water
          reservoir. Lake and Reservoir Management. 2:363-371.

          Cooke, G.D., E.B. Welch, A.B. Martin, D.G. Fulmer,  J.B.  Hyde, and G.D.
          Schrieve. 1993. Effectiveness of Al, Ca, and Fe salts for control of internal
          phosphorus loading in shallow and deep lakes. Hydrobiologia. 253:323-335.

          Dixit, S.S., B.F. Gumming, J.P. Smol, and J.C. Kingston. 1992.  Monitoring
          Environmental Changes in Lakes Using Algal Microfossils. In Ecological
          Indicators. Volume 2. Elsevier Applied Science.  1135-1155.

          Duda, A.M.,  M.L. Iwanski, R.J. Johnson, and J.A.  Jaksch.  1987. Numerical
          Standards for Managing Lake and Reservoir Water Quality. Lake and Reservoir
          Management. 3:1-27.

          Ernst, M.R., W. Frossard, and J.L. Mancini.  1994.  Two eutrophication models
          make the grade.  Water Environment and Technology, November, p. 15-16.

          Goldstein, A.L, and G. J.  Ritter. 1993.  A Performance-based Regulatory Program
          for Phosphorus Control to Prevent the Accelerated Eutrophication of Lake
          Okeechobbee, Florida. Water Science and Technology. 28(3-5): 13-26.

          Heiskary, S.A., and W.W. Walker.  1988. Developing Phosphorus Criteria for
          Minnesota Lakes. Lake and Reservoir Management. 4(1): 1-9.

          Heiskary, S.A. and C. B.  Wilson. 1989. The Regional  Nature of Lake Water
          Quality Across Minnesota: An Analysis for Improving Resource Management,
          Journal of the Minnesota  Academy of Science. 55(I):71-77.

          Heiskary, S.A. 1989.  Lake Protection Through Standards:  A State's Viewpoint. In
          Water Quality Standards for the 21st Century Proceedings of a National
          Conference. U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency. Office of Water. Washington,
          D.C. p. 117-121.

          Hughes,  R.M. and S.G. Paulsen. 1990.  Indicator strategy for inland surface  waters.
          p.  4-i - 4-20. In Hunsaker, C.T.  and D.E. Carpenter (eds.).  1990. Environmental
          monitoring and assessment program ecological indicators.  EPA/600/3-90/060.
          USEPA ORD AREAL, RTP, NC.

          Hughes,  R.M. et al. 1992. Lake and Stream Indicators for the United States
          Environmental Protection  Agency's Environmental Monitoring and Assessment
64     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Program. In Ecological Indicators, Volume 1. Elsevier Applied Science  p
 305-335.

 Hutchinson, G.E. 1969.  Eutrophication, past and present. In Eutropihication:
 Causes, Consequences,  Correctives.  National Academy of Sciences.

 Hutchinson, G.E. 1973. Eutrophication. The scientific background of a
 contemporary practical problem. American Sci.. 61:269-279.

 Johnson, R. J. 1989. Water Quality Standards for Lakes.  In Water Quality
 Standards for the 21st Century Proceedings of a National Conference. U.S.
 Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Water. Washington, D.C. p. 12-128.

 Jones, R.A., W.  Rast, G.F. Lee.  1979.  Relationships Between Summer Mean and
 Maximum  Chlorophyll a Concentration in Lakes.  Environmental Science and
 Technology.  13(7):869-870.

 Larsen, D.P., Stevens, D.L, Selle, A.R., and S.G. Paulsen. 1991. Environmental
 Monitoring and Assessment Program, EMAPSurface Waters: A Northeast Lakes
 Pilot. Lake and Reservoir Management. 7( 1): 1-11.

 Laws, E.A. and M.S. Chalup. 1990. A microalgal  growth model. Limnology and
 Oceanography. 35(3): 597-608.

 Lee, G.F. and R.A. Jones. 1991. Effects of eutrophication on Fisheries. Reviews in
Aquatic Sciences. 5(3-4):287-305.

 Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments (MWCG).  1982. A review  of
state water quality standards which pertain to nutrient enrichment Washington
D.C.                                                                    '

Michaud, J. P. 1991. A Citizen's Guide To Understanding and Monitoring Lakes
and Streams. The Department of Ecology  Publications Office. Olympia,
Washington.

Naumann, E. 1929.  The scope and chief problems of regional limnology. Int.
Revue ges.   Hydrobiologia.  21:423-.

Newbry, B. W., R. A. Jones and G. F. Lee.  1981.  Assessment and analysis of
eutrophication of Tennessee river system impoundments., Proceedings ASCE
Symposium on Surface water Impoundments, American Society of Civil Engineers.
p. 413-424.
                                                              References    65

-------
           North American Lake Management Society. 1988. Water Quality Standards for
           Lakes: A Survey. NALMS, Madison, Wisconsin.

           North American Lake Management Society. 1992. Developing Eutrophication
           Standards for Lakes and Reservoirs. A Report Prepared by the Lake Standards
           Subcommittee, May 1992.  NALMS, Alachua, Florida.

           Ostrofsky,  M.L. and F.H. Rigler.  1987.  Chlorophyll—Phosphorus Relationships
           for Subarctic Lakes in Western Canada.  Canadian Journal of Fisheries and
           Aquatic Sciences.  44:775-

           Porcella, D., S.A. Peterson and D.P. Larsen. 1980. Index to evaluate lake
           restoration. Journal of the  Environmental Engineering Division, ASCE. 106:1151.

           Porcella, D. 1989. Lake Protection Through Standards. In Water Quality Standards
          for the 21st Century: Proceedings of a National Conference.  U.S. Environmental
           Protection Agency. Office  of Water. Washington, D.C. p. 129-130.

           Quinn, J.M. 1991. Guidelines for the Control of Undesirable Biological Growths in
           Water. Consultancy Report No. 6213/2. Water Quality Centre, PO Box 11-115,
           Hamilton, New Zealand.

           Raschke, R.L. 1993. Guidelines for Assessing and Predicting Eutrophication Status
          of Small Southeastern Piedmont Impoundments. EPA Region IV Environmental
           Services Division, Ecological Support Branch, Athens GA  30605-2720.

          Raschke, R.L. 1994. Phytoplankton  Bloom  Frequencies in a Population of Small
          Southeastern Impoundments. Lake and Reservoir Management. 8(2):205-210.

          Rast,  W., and G.F. Lee.  1978. Summary Analysis of the North American (U.S.
          Portion) OECD Eutrophication Project:  Nutrient Loading-Lake Response
          Relationships and Trophic  State Indices,  USEPA, Corvallis Environmental
          Research Laboratory, Corvallis Oregon.  EPA-600-3/78-008.

          Seligman, K. A.K. Enos, and H.H. Lai. 1992. A Comparison of 1988-1990 Flavor
          Profile Analysis Results with Water Condtions in Two Northern California
          Reservoirs. Water Science & Technology. 25(2): 19-25.

          Smeltzer, E., and S.A. Heiskary. 1990. Analysis and Applications of Lake User
          Survey Data. Lake and Reservoir Management. 6(1):109-118.

          Smeltzer, E. 1992. Developing Eutrophication Standards for Lake Champlain  from
          User Survey Data. Vermont Department of Environmental Conservation.
          Waterbury, Vermont.
66     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Smith, R.L. 1974. Ecology and field biology. 2nd Edition. Harper & Row, Publ.,
 New York.

 Suter, G.W. II. 1990. Endpoints  for regional ecological risk assessments.
 Environmental Management. 14:9-23.

 Thomann, R.V. and J. A. Mueller.  1987.  Principles of Surface Water Quality
 Modeling and Control  Harper and Row.  New York, NY.

 USEPA. 1992. National Water Quality Inventory. 1990 Report to Congress. EPA
 503/9-92/006.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. 1994a. National Water Quality Inventory. 1992 Report to Congress. EPA
 841-R-94-001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. 1994b. Report of the Nutrient Task Force. U.S. Environmental Protection
 Agency. Office of Science and Technology. Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. 1994c. Water Quality Standards Handbook: Second Edition.
 EPA-823-B-94-005a. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Water.
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA. In review.  Compendium of Tools for Watershed Assessment and TMDL
 Development.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
 Washington, D.C.

 van der Molen, D.T. and P.C.M.  Boers. 1994. Influence of internal loading on
 phosphorus concentration in shallow lakes before and after reduction of the
 external loading. Hydrobiologia. 275/76:379-389.

 Vollenweider, R.  A.  1968. Scientific fundamentals of the eutrophication of lakes
 and flowing waters, with particular reference to nitrogen and phosphorus as
factors in eutrophication. Technical Report DAS/CSI/68.27, Organization for
 Economic Cooperation and Development, Paris.

 Vollenweider, R.A., and JJ. Kerekes. 1980. Background  and summary results of
 the OECD cooperative program on eutrophication. In International Symposium on
 Inland Waters and Lake Restoration. EPA 440/5-81-010. U.S. Environmental
 Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.

 Walker, W.W, Jr. 1979.  Use of Hypolimnetic Oxygen Depletion Rate as a Trophic
 State Index for Lakes. Water Resources Research. 15(6): 1463-1470.
                                                              References    67

-------
           Watson, S., E. McCauley, and J.A. Downing,  1992. Sigmoid relationships between
           phosphorus, algal biomass, and algal community structure. Canadian Journal of
           Fish and Aquatic Science. 49:2605-2610,

           Weber, C.A.  1907.  Aufbau and vegetation der Moore Norddeutschlands, Bot.
           Jahrb. 40. Beiblatt zo den Botanischen Jahrbuchern, 90:19-34.

           Wetzei, R. G., 1983. Limnology. 2nd ed. Saunders College Publishing. Fort Worth,
           1 -A..

           Whittier, T.R. and S.G. Paulsen. 1992. The surface waters component of the
           Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program (EMAP): an overview.
           Journal of Aquatic Ecosystem Health.  1:119-126.

           Model References for Lakes and Reservoirs

           EUTROMOD

           Hession, W.C., D.E. Storm, S.L. Burks, M.D.  Smolen,  R. Lakshminarayanan, and
           C.T. Haan.  1995. Using Eutromod with a GIS for establishing total  maximum
           daily loads to Wister Lake, Oklahoma.  In Impact of Animal Waste on the Land-
           Water Interface, p. 53-60.  Lewis Publishers (in press).

           Reckhow, K.H.  1990.  EUTROMOD spreadsheet program - a regional modeling
           scheme for nutrient runoff and lake trophic state modeling. School of Forestry  and
           Environmental Studies, Duke University, Durham, NC.

           PHOSMOD

           Chapra, S., and R.P. Canale.  1991. Long-term phenomenological model of
           phosphorus and oxygen for stratified lakes.  Water Research.  25(6):707-715.

           Chapra, S.  1991. PHOSMOD  1.0 - Software to model seasonal and long-term
           trends of total phosphorus and oxygen  in stratified lakes.  CADWES Working
           Paper No.  14, The University of Colorado, Campus Box 428, Boulder, CO.

           BATHTUB

          Ernst, M.R., W. Frossard, and J.L. Mancini.  1994. Two eutrophication models
          make the grade.  Water Environment and Technology, November, p. 15-16.

          Kennedy, R.H.,  1995. Application of the BATHTUB Model to selected South
          Eastern Reservoirs. Technical Report EL-95-14, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways
          Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.


68     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Walker, W.W., 1985.  Empirical methods for predicting eutrophication in
 impoundments; Report 3, Phase HI:  Model Refinements.  Technical Report E-81-
 9, U. S, Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.

 Walker, W.W.,  1986.  Empirical methods for predicting Eutrophication in
 Impoundments; Report 4, Phase II:  Applications Manual.  Technical Report E-81-
 9, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.

 WASPS

 Ambrose, R.B., T.A. Wool, and J.L. Martin.  1993.  The water quality analysis
 simulation program.  WASPS version 5.10 Part A:  Model Documentation.
 Environmental Research Laboratory, Office of Research and Development,
 USEPA, Athens, Georgia 30613.

 Cheng, C, J.F. Atkinson, and J.V. DePinto.  1994.  A coupled GIS-Water Quality
 modeling  study.  In Proceedings of the 1994 Hydraulic Engineering Conference,
 American Society of Civil Engineers, Buffalo, New York, p. 247-251.

 Cockrum, O.K., and J.J.  Warwick. 1994.  Assessing the impact of agricultural
 activities on water quality in a periphyton dominated stream using the Water
 Quality Analysis Program (WASP).  In Proceedings of the Symposium on the
 Effects of Human-Induced Changes on Hydrologic Systems, American Water
 Resources Association, Jackson Hole, Wyoming, June 26-29, 1994, p.  1157.

 Lang, G.A.,  and T.D. Fontaine.  1990.  Modeling the  fate  and transport of organic
contaminants in Lake St. Clair.  Journal of Great Lakes Research, 16(2):216-232

Lung, W., and C.E. Larson. 1995. Water Quality Modeling of the Upper
Mississippi River  and Lake Pepin. Journal of Environmental Engineering,
 l21(10):691-699.

Lu, Z., G.C. April, D.C.  Raney,  and W. W. Schroeder.  1994.  DO, BOD, and
Organic Nitrogen  transport in Weeks Bay, Alabama. In Proceedings of the
National Symposium on Water Quality, American Water Resources Association,
Chicago, Illinois, November 6-10, 1994, p. 191-200.

Tetra Tech, Inc.  1995. Hydrodynamic and water quality mathematical modeling
study of Norfolk Harbor, Connecticut - Final report.  Fairfax, VA 22030.

CE-QUAL-W2

Barnese, L.E., and J.A. Bohannon. 1994. The distribution of nutrients  and
phytoplankton in Taylorsville Lake—a model  study.  In Symposium Proceedings
                                                             References    69

-------
          on Responses to Changing Multiple-Use Demands: New Directions for Water
          Resources Planning and Management. American Water Resources Association,
          Nashville, TN, April 17-20, 1994, p. 33-35.

          Cole, R.W., and E.M. Buchak.  1995.  CE-QUAL-W2:  A  two-dimensional,
          laterally averaged, hydrodynamic and water quality model.  Version 2.0
          Instructional Report EL-95-1, U.S. Army  Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
          Vicksburg, MS.

          Martin, J.L.  1988.  Application of two-dimensional water quality model.  Journal
          of Environmental Engineering.  114(2):317-336.

          CE-QUAL-ICM

          Cerco, C.F., and T. Cole.  1995.  User's Guide to the CE-QUAL-ICM. Release
          Version  1.0.  Technical Report. EL-95-1.  U.S. Army Engineer Waterways
          Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS.
70     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Rivers and Streams

 Bothwell, M.L.   1985.  Phosphorus limitation of lotic periphyton growth rates:  An
 intersite comparison using continuous-flow troughs (Thompson River system;
 British Columbia).  Limnology and Oceanography. 30:527-542.

 Bothwell, M.L.  1988.  Growth rate responses of lotic periphyton diatoms to
 experimental phosphorus enrichment:  the influence of temperature and light.
 Canadian Journal of Fisheries and Aquatic Science. 45:261-270.

 Boynton, W.R.,  W.M.  Kemp and C.W. Keefe 1982. A comparative analysis of
 nutrients and other factors influencing estuarine phytoplankton production.  In V.S.
 Kennedy (ed.) Estuarine Comparisons, Academic Press, New York, pp. 69-90.

 Chiaudani, G. and M. Vighi.  1974. The N:P ratio  and tests with Selenastrum to
 predict eutrophication in lakes. Water Research.  8: 1063-0169.

 Dodds, W.K. and V.H. Smith.  1995.  Managing excess chlorophyll levels in the
 Clark Fork River with nutrient controls.  A report  presented  to the Montana
 Department of Health and Environmental Science.

 Heiskary, S.A. and C.B. Wilson.  1989.  The Regional Nature of Lake Water
 Quality Across Minnesota:  An Analysis for Improving Resource Management.
 Journal of the Minnesota Academy  of Science. 55( 1 ):71 -77.

 Homer, R.R., E.B. Welch, M.R. Seeley, and J.M. Jacoby.  1990.  Freshwater
 Biology. 24:215-232.

 Hughes, R.M., T.R. Whittier, S.A. Thieie, I.E. Pollard, D.V.  Peck, S.G. Paulsen, D.
 McMullen, J. Lazorchak, D.P. Larsen, W.L. Kinney, P.R. Kaufmann, S. Hedtke,
 S.S. Dixit, G.B. Collins, and J.R. Baker.  1992. Lake and Stream Indicators for
 the United States Environmental Protection Agency's Environmental  Monitoring  and
 Assessment Program.  In Ecological Indicators.  Volume 1.  Elsevier Applied
 Science, p. 305-335.

 Ingman, G.L.  1992,  A rationale and altenatives for controlling nutrients and
eutrophication problems in the Clark Fork River Basin.  State of  Montanta.
Department of Health and Environmental Sciences.  Water Quality Bureau.

Johnson, B.L., W.B. Richardson, and T.J. Naimo.  Past, Present, and Future
Concepts in Large River Ecology.   BioScience.  45(3): 134-141.

Jones, J.R. M.M  Smart, and J.N. Burroughs. 1984.  Factors related to algal
biiomass in Missouri Ozard  streams. Verh. int. Verein. Limnol.  22:1867-1875.
                                                              References    71

-------
           Michaud, J.P,  1991,  A Citizen's Guide To Understanding and Monitoring Lakes
           and Streams.  The Department of Ecology Publications Office.  Olympia,
           Washington.

           North American Lake Management Society.  1992.  Developing Eutrophication
           Standards for Lakes and Reservoirs,  A Report Prepared by the Lake Standards
           Subcommittee. May 1992.  NALMS, Alachua, Flordia.

           Porcella, D.  1989.  Lake Protection Through Standards.  In Water Quality
           Standards for the 21st Century:  Proceedings of a National Conference.  U.S.
           Environmental Protection Agency.  Office of Water. Washington, D.C. p. 129-
           130.

           Quinn, J.M.  1991.  Guidelines for the Control of Undesirable Biological Growths
           in Water. Consultancy Report No. 6213/2.  Water Quality Centre, PO Box 11-115,
           Hamilton, New Zealand.

           Suter, G.W.  II.  1990. Endpoints for regional ecological risk assessments.
           Environmental Management.  14:9-23.

           USEPA.   1993.  Clark Fork  - Pend Oreille Basin Water Quality Study. Region  10.
           Water Division.  Seattle, Washington.

           USEPA.   1994a. National Water Quality Inventory.  1992 Report to Congress.
           EPA 841-R-94-OQ1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,
           Washington, D.C.

           USEPA.   1994b.  Water Quality Standards Handbook:  Second Edition.  EPA-823-
           B-94-005a.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Office of Water.
           Washington, D.C.

           Vollenweider, R.A.  1968.  Scientific fundamentals of the eutrophication of lakes
          and flowing waters,  with particular reference to nitrogen  and phosphorus as
          factors in eutrophication. Technical  Report DAS/CSI768.27, Organization for
          Economic Cooperation and Development, Paris.

          Walton, S.P. E.B. Welch, and R.R. Horner.  1995. Stream periphyton response to
          grazing and changes in phosphorus concentration. Hydrobiologica. 302:31-46.

          Welch, E.B., R.R. Homer, and C.R. Patmont.  1989.  Prediction of Nuisance
          Periphytic Biomass: A Management Approach.  Water Research.   23(4):40I-405.
72     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Model References for Rivers and Streams

 QUAL2E

 Brown, L.C., and T.O. Barnwell.  1987.  The enhanced stream water quality model
 QUAL2E and QUAL2E-UNCAS: Documentation and user manual,  EPA60Q/3-
 87/007, USEPA, Athens, GA 30605,

 Johnson, C.R., and G. Mercer.   1994. Modeling the water quality processes of the
 Chicago Waterway. In Proceedings of the national Symposium on Water Quality.
 American Water Resources Association, Chicago, Illinois, November 6-10  1994 p
 315.

 Paschal, Jr., J.E., and O.K. Mueller.  1991.  Simulation of water quality and the
 effects of waste water effluent on the South Plane River from Chatfield Reservoir
 through Denver,  Colorado.  Water-Resources Investigations Report 91-4016.  U.S.
 Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado.

 WASPS

 Cockrum, D.K., and JJ. Warwick. 1994. Assessing the impact of agricultural
 activities on water quality in a periphyton dominated stream using the Water
 Quality Analsyis Program (WASP). In Proceedings of the Symposium on the
 Effects of Human-Induced Changes on Hydrological Systems, American  Water
 Resources Association, Jackson Hole, Wyoming, June 26-29, 1994, p. 1157.

 Lung, W., and C.E. Larson. 1995. Water Quality Modeling of the Upper
 Mississippi River and Lake Pepin. Journal of Environmental Engineering.
 121(10):691-699.

 Tetra Tech, Inc.  1995. Hydrodynamic and water quality mathematical modeling
 study of Norfolk Harbor, Connecticut - Final report.  Fairfax, VA 22030.

 Stoddard, A., M.R. Morton, J.R.  Pagenkopf, W. Lung, J. Hamrick, and M.R.
 Overton.In press.  Eutrophication and oxygen depletion in Norwalk Harbor,
 Connecticut: Development of a hydrodynamic and water quality model for a
TMDL waste load allocation of nitrogen.  Proceedings from ASCE's  4th
International Conference on Estuarine and Coastal Modeling, San Diego, CA,
 October 26-28, 1995.

 CE-QUAL-W2

Cole, R.W., and E.M Buchak.  1995.  CE-QUAL-W2:  A two-dimensional,
 laterally averaged, hydrdynbamic and water quality model. Version 2.0
                                                             References   73

-------
          Instructional Report EL-95-1, U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station,
          Vicksburg, MS,

          Estuaries and Coastal Waters

          Ammerman, J.W and F. Azam.  1991. Bacterial 5'-nucleotidase activity in
          estuarine and coastal marine waters: Role in phosphorus regeneration. Limnology
          and Oceanography. 36: 1437-1447.

          Batiuk, R.A. et al.  1992. Chesapeake Bay submerged aquatic vegetation habitat
          requirements and restoration targets: a technical synthesis. CPB/TRS 83/92. U.S.
          EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD.

          Boynton, W.R., W.M. Kernp and C.W. Keefe.  1982. A comparative analysis of
          nutrients and other factors influencing estuarine phytoplankton production. In V.S.
          Kennedy (ed.) Estuarine Comparisons, Academic  Press, New York, pp. 69-90.

          Brush, G.R. 1989. Rates and patterns of estuarine sediment accumulation.
          Limnology and Oceanography. 34: 1235-1246.

          Chapra, S. 1977. Total phosphorus model for the Great Lakes. Journal of.
          Environmental Engingeering, ASCE 103:  147-161.

          Chiaudani, G. and M. Vighi 1974. The N:P ratio and tests with Selenastmm to
          predict eutrophication in lakes. Water Research,   8:1063-0169.

          Conley, DJ, C.L. Schelske and E.F. Stoermer 1993. Modification of the
          biogeochemical cycle of silica  with eutrophication. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser.  101: 179-
          192.

          Cooper/S.R. and G.S. Brush 1991. Long-term history of Chesapeake Bay anoxia.
          Science 254: 992-996.

          Cooper, S.R. and G.S. Brush 1993. A 2,500-year history of anoxia and
          eutrophication in Chesapeake Bay. Estuaries. 16: 617-626.

          D'Elia, C.F. 1982. Nutrient enrichment of Chesapeake Bay: an historical
          perspective. In E.G. Macalaster, D.A. Barker and M. Kasper (eds.), Chesapeake
          Bay Program Technical Studies: A Synthesis. U.S. EPA, Washington, D.C., pp. 45-
          102.

          den Hartog, 1970. The seagrasses of the world. North-Holland, Amsterdam, 275
          PP-
74     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Dennison, W. et al.  1993. Assessing water quality with submersed aquatic
 vegetation, BioScience, 43: 86-94.

 Dobson, J.E.  1995.  NOAA Coastal Change Analysis Program (C-CAP): guidance
for regional implementation.  NOAA Technical Report NMFS 123.

 Frithsen, J.B.  1991.  Benthic communities as indicators of estuarine eutrophication.
 In Hinga, K.R. et al. (eds.) The National Estuarine Eutrophication Project:
 Workshop Proceedings. Rockville, MD: NOAA and Univ. of Rhode Island. 41  pp.

 Gallegos, C.L. 1993. Development of optical models for protection of seagrass
 habitats. In Morris, L.J. and D.A. Tomasko (eds.), Proceedings and conclusions of
 workshops on submerged aquatic vegetation and photosynthetically active
 radiation, Special Publication SJ93-SP13. Palatka, FL: St.  Johns River Water
 Management District, pp. 77-90.

 Gallegos, C.L. 1994. Refining habitat requirements of submersed aquatic
 vegetation: role  of optical  models. Estuaries 17:  187-199.

 Harding, L.W., Jr., M. Leffler and G.E. Mackiernan 1992. Dissolved oxygen in  the
 Chesapeake Bay: A scientific concensus. Maryland Seagrant, College  Park, MD.

 Heinle, D.R. and others 1980. Historical review of water quality and climatic data
from Chesapeake Bay with emphasis on effects of enrichment. U.S. EPA
 Chesapeake Bay Program final report, grant no. R806189010. Chesapeake
 Research Consortium, Publication No. 84.

 Hurley, L. 1990. Field Guide to the Submerged Aquatic Vegetation of Chesapeake
 Bay. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, Annapolis, Maryland, 51 pp.

 Justic, D., T. Legovic and L.  Tottini-Sandrini.  1987. Trends in oyxgen content
 1911-1984 and occurrence of benthic mortality in the northern Adriatic Sea. Est.
 Coast. Shelf Sci. 25: 435-445.

 Justic, D. N.N. Rabalais, R.E. Turner and Q. Dortch 1995. Changes in nutrient
 structure of river-dominated coastal  waters:  stoichiometric nutrient balance and  its
 consequences. Est. Coast. Shelf Sci. 40: 339-356.

 Kemp, W.M, R.L. Wetzel, W.R. Boynton, C.F. D'Elia and L.C.  Stevenson 1982.
 Nitrogen cycling and estuarine interfaces. In V.S. Kennedy (ed.) Estuarine
 Comparisons,  Academic Press, New York, pp.  209-230.

 Kenworthy, WJ. and D.E. Haunert  (eds.). 1991. The light requirements of
seagrasses: proceedings of a  workshop to examine the capability of water quality
                                                               References    75

-------
           criteria, standards and monitoring programs to protect seagrasses. NOAA
           Technical Memorandum NMFS-SEFC-287.

           Kirk, J.T.O.  1983. Light and photosynthesis in aquatic ecosystems. New York:
           Cambridge University Press, 401  pp.

           Klein, CJ. and S.P. Orlando 1989. Estuarine pollution susceptibility: an approach
           to classification. Stategic Assessment Branch, NOS/NOAA.

           McPherson, B.F.  and  R.L. Miller.  1987. The vertical  attenuation of light in
           Charlotte Harbor, a shallow, subtropical estuary, southwestern Florida. Est. Coast.
           Shelf Sci. 25: 721-737.

           Miller, R.L. and B.F.  McPherson  1995. Modeling photosynthetically active
           radiation in water of Tampa Bay, Florida, with emphasis on the geometry of
           incident irradiance. Est. Coast. Shelf Sci. 40: 359-377.

           Morris, L.J. and D.A. Tomasko (eds.) 1993. Proceedings and conclusions of
           workshops on submerged aquatic vegetation and photosynthetically active
           radiation, Special Publication SJ93-SP13. Palatka, FL: St. Johns River Water
           Management District. 243 pp. + Appendix

           Neckles, H., R.L. Wetzel and R.J. Orth.  1993. Relative effects of nutrient
           enrichment and grazing on epiphyte-macrophyte (Zostera marina L.) dynamics.
           Oecologia 93: 285-295.

           Nixon, S.  1995. Coastal marine eutrophication: a definition, social causes, and
           future concerns. Ophelia 41: 199-219.

           NOAA.  1985.  National  Estuarine Inventory Data Atlas: Physical and Hydrologic
           Characteristics. Vol  1. Strategic Assessment Branch, NOAA.

           NOAA/ORCA.  1993. NOAA's National Assessment of Nutrient Enrichment
           Conditions in Estuaries—Program Plan, Spring 1993. Office of Ocean Resources
           Conservation and Assessment, NOS/NOAA.

           Officer, C.B, and J.H. Ryther, 1980. The possible importance of silicon in marine
           eutrophication. Mar. Ecol. Prog.  Ser. 3: 83-91.

           Orth, R.J. and K.A. Moore.  1983. Chesapeake Bay: an unprecedented decline in
           submerged aquatic vegetation. Science 222: 51-53.
76     An Overview of Available Endpoinls and Assessment Tools

-------
 Orth, RJ. and K.A. Moore.  1986. Seasonal and year-to-year variations in the
 growth of Zostera marina L. (eelgrass) in the lower Chesapeake Bay. Aquat. Bat
 24: 335-341.

 Pearson, T.H. and R.  Rosenberg.  1978. Macrobenthic succession in relation to
 organic enrichment and pollution of the marine environment. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol,
 Ann. Rev. 16: 229-311.

 Quinn, H.A., J.P. Tolson, CJ. Klein, S.P. Orlando and C. Alexander.  1989.
 Strategic assessment of near coastal waters. Susceptibility of east coast estuaries to
 nutrient discharges: Passamaquoddy Bay to Chesapeake Bay. Summary Report,
 Strategic Assessment  Branch, NOS/NOAA, Rockville, MD. 37 pp.

 Raiswell, R., F. Buckley, R.A. Berner and T.F.  Anderson 1988. Degree of
 pyritization of iron as a paieoenvironmental indicator of bottom-water oxygenation.
 J. Sed. Petrol. 58: 812-819.

 Raschke, R.L. and D.A. Schultz.  1987. The use of the algal growth potential test
 for data assessment. Journal of the Water Pollution Control Federation. 59,  222-
 227.

 Ryther, J.H. and C.B. Officer. 1981. Impact of nutrient enrichment on water uses.
 In Neilson, B.J. and L.E. Cronin (eds.), Estuaries and Nutrients, Humana Press,
 Clifton, NJ, pp. 247-261.

 Schaffner, L.C., P. Jonsson, RJ. Diaz, R. Rosenberg and P.  Gapcynski. 1992.
 Benthic communities and bioturbation history of estuarine and coastal systems:
 effects of hypoxia and anoxia. In R.A. Vollenweider and R. Marchetti, R. Viviani
 (eds.),  Marine Coastal Eutrophication, pp. 1001-1016.

 Schelske, C.L. and E.F. Stoerrner.  1971. Eutrophication, silica depletion, and
 predicted changes in algal quality in Lake Michigan. Science 173: 423-424.

 Schelske, C.L. and E.F. Stoerrner.  1972. Phosphorus, silica and eutrophication in
 Lake Michigan. In Likens, G.E. (ed.) Nutrients and Eutrophication. American
 Society of Limnology and Oceanography. Lawrence, KS, pp. 157-171.

 Seitzinger, S.P. 1988.  Denitrification in freshwater and coastal marine ecosystems:
ecological and geochemical significance. Limnology and Oceanography. 33: 702-
724.

Smith,  M.E. and D.M. Dauer 1994. Eutrophication and macrobenthic communities
of the lower Chesapeake Bay: I. acute effects of low dissolved  oxygen in the
Rappahannock River.  In Toward a Sustatainable Coastal Watershed: The
                                                               References    77

-------
           Chesapeake Experiment. Proceedings of a Conference, Chesapeake Research
           Consortium Publ. No. 149. CRC, Solomons, MD.

           Suter II, G.W,  1990. Endpoints for regional ecological risk assessment.
           Environmental Management  14, 19-23.

           Turner, R.E. and N.N. Rabalais 1991. Changes in Mississippi River water quality
           this century-implications for coastal food webs. BioScience 41:  140-147.

           US EPA  1985. Water Quality assessment: a screening procedure for toxics and
           conventional pollutants in surface and ground waters-Part II (Revised).
           EPA/600/6-85/002b. USEPA Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

           USEPA  1986. Ambient water quality criteria for  dissolved oxygen. EPA/440/5-86-
           003. Office of Water Regulations and Standards,  U.S. EPA, Washington, D.C.

           USEPA. 1992. Framework for Ecological Risk Assessment. EPA/630/R-92/001.
           U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Risk Assessment Forum, Washington, D.C.

           USEPA  1994. Report of the Nutrient Task Force  (Draft, 30 December 1994). U.S.
           Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Science and Technology, Washington,
           D.C.

           Vadstein, O., A. Jensen, Y, Olsen and H. Reinert.  1988. Growth and phosphorus
           status of limnetic phytoplankton and  bacteria.  Limnology and Oceanography. 33:
           489-503

           Vargo, G.A. and E. Shaney.  1985. Alkaline phosphatase activity in the red-tide
          dinoflagellate, Ptychodiscus brevis. Marine Ecology. 6: 251-264.

          Walsh, J.J. G.T. Rowe, R.L. Iverson  and C.P. McRoy.  1981. Biological export of
          shelf carbon is a neglected sink of the global CO2 cycle. Nature 291: 196-201.

          Wetzel, R.L. and M.B. Meyers, 1994. Ecosystem  process modeling of submerged
          aquatic vegetation  in the lower Chesapeake Bay.  CBP/TRS 127/94. EPA
          Chesapeake Bay Program, Annapolis, MD, 66 pp.

          Model References for Estuaries and Coastal Waters

          WASPS

          Cockrum, D.K., and J.J. Warwick.  1994.  Assessing the impact of agricultural
          activities on water quality in a periphyton dominated stream using the Water
          Quality Analsyis Program (WASP).   In Proceedings of the Symposium on the
78     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Effects of Human-Induced Changes on Hydrological Systems, American Water
 Resources Association, Jackson Hole, Wyoming, June 26-29, 1994, p.  1157.

 Lung, W., and C.E. Larson.  1995. Water Quality Modeling of the Upper
 Mississippi River and Lake Pepin.  Journal of Environmental Engineering
 I21(10):691-699.

 Tetra Tech, Inc.  1995.  Hydrodynamic and water quality mathematical modeling
 study of Norfolk Harbor, Connecticut - Final report. Fairfax, VA 22030.

 Stoddard, A., M.R. Morton, J.R. Pagenkopf, W. Lung, J. Hamrick, and M.R.
 Overton. in press. Eutrophication and oxygen depletion in Norwalk Harbor,
 Connecticut: Development of a hydrodynamic and water quality model for a
 TMDL waste load allocation of nitrogen.  Proceedings from ASCE's 4th
 International Conference on Estuarine and Coastal Modeling, San Diego, CA,
 October 26-28, 1995.

 TPM

 Cerco, C.F. and T. Cole.  1993. Three-dimensional  eutrophication model of the
 Chesapeake Bay.  Journal of Environmental Engineering.  119(6): 1006-1025.

 Kuo, A. Y., and BJ. Neilson.  1988.  A modified tidal prism model for water
 quality  in  small coastal embayments.  Water Science Technology. 20(6/7): 133-142.

 CE-QUAL-ICM

 Cerco, C.F. and T. Cole.  1993.  Three-dimensional  eutrophication model of the
 Chesapeake Bay.  Journal of Environmental Engineering.  \ 19(6): 1006-1025.

 Wetlands

 Adamus, P.R., E.J. Clairain, Jr., R.D. Smith,  and R.E. Young. 1987.  Wetland
 Evaluation Technique (WET). U.S. Army Engineer Water-ways Experiment
 Station, Vicksburg, MS.

 Adamus, P.R.  1992. Choices in monitoring wetlands. In McKenzie, D.H., D.E.
 Hyatt and  V.J. McDonald (eds). Ecological Indicators Volume I.  Elsevier Applied
Science, pp. 571-592.

Baker, L.A. 1992. Introduction to nonpoint source pollution in the United States
and prospects for wetland use. Ecological. Engineering.  1:1-26.
                                                              References   79

-------
           Bowden, W.B. et al.  1991.  Transport and Processing of nitrogen in a Tidal
           Freshwater Wetland.  Water Resources Research.  27(3):389-408.

           Brinson, M.M. 1993.  A Hydrogeotnorphic Classification of Wetlands.  U.S. Army
           Corps of Engineers. Technical Report No. WRP-DE-4.  79 pp.

           Burns, L.A. and R.B.  Taylor, III.  1977.  A model of nutrient uptake in marsh
           ecosystems. American Society of Civil Engineers, San Francisco, CA.

           Chambers, R.M., J.W. Harvey, and W.E.  Odum.  1992.  Ammonium and
           Phosphate Dynamics in a Virginia Salt Marsh.  Estuaries 15(3):349-359.

           Chescheir, G.M., J.W. Gilliam, R.W. Skaggs, and R.G. Broadhead.  199la.
           Nutrient and Sediment Removal in Forested Wetlands Receiving Pumped
           Agricultural Drainage Water. Wetlands 1 t(l):87-103.

           Chescheir, G.M., R.M. Skaggs, J.W. Gilliam, and R.G. Broadhead.  1991b.
           Hydrology of Two Forested  Wetlands that Receive Pumped Agricultural Drainage
           Water in Eastern North Carolina.  Wetlands 1 l(l):29-53.

           Clausen, J.C. and G.D. Johnson.   1990. Lake Level Influences on Sediment and
           Nutrient Retention in  a Lakeside Wetland. Journal of Environmental Quality
           19:83-88.

           Cooper, J. and J. Gilliam.  1987.  Phosphorus redistribution from cultivated fields
           into riparian areas. Soil Science Society of America Journal, 51:1600-1604.

           Correll, D.L., T.E. Jordan, and D.E. Weller.  1992.  Nutrient Flux in a Landscape:
           Effects of Coastal Land Use  and Terrestrial community Mosaic on Nutrient
           Transport  to Coastal Waters. Estuaries 15(4):431-442.

           Costanza,  R., S.C.  Farber and J. Maxwell, 1989. Valuation and management of
           wetland ecosystems. Ecol.  Econ. 1: 335-361.

           Cowardin, L.M., V. Carter, F.C. Golet, and E.T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of
           wetlands and deep water habitats of the United States. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv. 103.

           Detenbeck, N.E., C.A. Johnston, and G.J.  Niemi. 1993.  Wetland effects on lake
           water quality in the Minneapolis/St.  Paul metropolitan area. Landscape Ecol.
           8(I):39-6I.

           Prayer, W.E. TJ. Monahan, D.C. Bowden, and F.A. Graybill. 1983. Status and
           trends of wetlands  and deep  water habitats in the conterminous United States,
           1950's to  1970's.  U.S. Department of Interior, Fish and Wildlife Service, St.
           Petersburg, FL.

80     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 German, E.R.  1989.  Removal of Nitrogen and Phosphorus in an Undeveloped
 Wetland Area, Central Florida,  Wetlands: Concerns and Successes, pp. 139-147.

 Gilliam, J.W., G.M. Chescheir, R.W. Skaggs, and R.G. Broadhead.  1991.  Effects
 of Pumped Agricultural Drainage Water on Wetland Water Quality.  The Ecology
 and Management of Wetlands Volume 2: Management,  Use and Value of
 Wetlands (Hook,  D.D., W.H, McKee, Jr., H.K. Smith, J. Gregory, V.G. Burrell, Jr.,
 M.R. DeVoe, R.E. Sojka, S. Gilbert, R. Banks, L.H. Stolzy, C. Brooks, T.D.
 Matthews, and T.H. Shear, eds.).

 Gilliam, J.W. 1994.  Riparian Wetlands and Water Quality.  Journal  of
 Environmental Quality 23:896-900.

 Hammer D.A. 1989. (Ed). Constructed Wetlands for Wastewater Treatment. Lewis
 Publishers, Chelsea, Michigan.  831  pp.

 Hanson, G.C., P.M. Groffman, and A.J. Gold. 1994. Denitrification in riparian
 wetlands receiving high and low groundwater nitrate inputs. Journal of
 Environmental Quality. 23: 917-922.

 Howard-Williams, C.  1985.  Cycling and retention of Nitrogen and Phosphorus in
 wetlands: a theoretical and applied perspective.  Freshwater Biology 15:391-431.

 Johnston, C.A.  1991.  Sediment and Nutrient Retention  by Freshwater Wetlands:
 Effects on Surface Water Quality.  University of Minnesota, Duluth, Natural
 Resources Research Institute.  CRC Critical Reviews in Environmental Control,
 21(5)(6):491-565.

 Johnston, C.A. 1989.  Human impacts to Minnesota wetlands.   J.  of Minneapolis
Academy of Sciences. 55: 120-124.

Johnston, C.A., G.D. Bubenzer, G.B. Lee, F.W. Madison and J.R. McHenry. 1984.
Nutrient trapping  by sediment deposition in a seasonally  flooded lakeside wetland.
J. Environ.  Qual.  13:  283-290.

 Kadlec, R.H., 1983. The Bellaire wetland: wastewater alteration and recovery.
 Wetlands, 3,44, 1983.

 Kemp, G.P., W.H. Conner, and J.W. Day, Jr.  1985. Effects of Flooding  on
Decomposition and Nutrient Cycling in a Louisiana Swamp Forest.  Wetlands,
5:35-51.

Kent, D.M., R.J. Reimold, J.M. Kelly and C.E. Tammi. 1992.  Coupling wetlands
structure and  function: developing a condition index for wetlands  monitoring.  In
                                                              References    81

-------
            McKenzie, D.H., D.E. Hyatt and VJ. McDonald (eds). Ecological Indicators
            Volume I.  Elsevier Applied Science, pp.559-570.

            Knight, R.L. 1992. Ancillary benefits and potential problems with the use of
            wetlands for nonpoint source pollution control. Ecological Engineering.  1(1992)


            Kuenzler, E.J.  1988.  Value of Forested Wetlands as Filters for Sediments and
            Nutrients. USFS/et al.  Forested Wetlands of the South US Symposium  Orlando
            FL, July 12-14, 1988, 85(12).

            Landers, J.C. and B.A. Knuth.   1991. Use of Wetlands for Water Quality
            Improvement under the USEPA Region V Clean Lakes Program.  Environmental
           Management 15(2): 151-162.

           Leibowitz, N.C. and M.T. Brown.  1990. Indicator strategy for wetlands.
           Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program, Ecological Indicators
           EPA/600/3-90/060, pp. 5.1-5.15.

           Masscheleyn, P.M., et al.  1992. Phosphorus Release and Assimilatory Capacity of
           Two Lower Mississippi Valley Freshwater Wetland Soils.  Water Resources
           Bulletin 28(4):763-772.

           Mendelssohn, LA. and K.L. McKee. 1992. Indicators of environmental stress  in
           wetland plants. In:  McKenzie, D.H., D.E. Hyatt and VJ. McDonald (eds).
           Ecological Indicators Volume I.  Elsevier Applied Science, pp. 603-624.

           Mitsch, W.J.  1992a. Landscape design and the role of created,  restored and natural
           riparian wetlands in the controlling nonpoint source pollution.  Ecological
           Engineering  I (1992) 27-47.

           Mitsch, W.J. 1992b. Ecological indicators for ecological engineering in wetlands.
           In: McKenzie, D.H., D.E. Hyatt and VJ. McDonald (eds). Ecological Indicators
           Volume L  Elsevier Applied Science, pp. 537-558.

           Mitsch, W.J., B.C. Reeder and D.M. Klarer.  1991. The Role of Wetlands in  the
           Control of Nutrients w/a Case Study of Western Lake Erie.  Ohio Sea Grant.  In
           Ecological Engineering An Introduction to Ecotechnology, pp. 129-158.

           Moshiri, G.A. 1993. Constructed Wetlands for Water Quality Improvement.
           Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL.  632 pp.

          Nixon, S.W. and V. Lee. 1986.  Wetlands and Water Quality: A Regional Review
          of Recent Research in the United States on the  Role of Freshwater and Saltwater
          Wetlands as Sources, Sinks, and Transformers of Nitrogen, Phosphorus, and

82     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------
 Various Heavy Metals, Rhode Island University, Kingston Graduate School of
 Oceanography.  Technical Report Y 86 2, October 1986.  Final Report, 229 pp.

 Odum, E.P. 1971. Fundamentals of Ecology.  W,B. Saunders Co. Philadelphia,  PA
 574 pp.

 Olson, R.K. (Ed). 1993.  Created and natural wetlands for controlling nonpoint
 source pollution.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Wetlands,
 Oceans and Watersheds. 216 pp.

 Phillips, P., J. Denver, R. Shedlock, and P Hamilton.  1993.   Effect of forested
 wetlands on nitrate concentrations in ground water and surface water on the
 Delmarva peninsula.  Wetlands !3(2):75-83.

 Reddy, K.R. et al.  1989.  Nitrification-denitrification at the plant root-sediment
 interface in wetlands. Limnology and  Oceanography. 34(6): 1004-1013.

 Rhodes, J.  et al.  1985.  Quantification of Nitrate Uptake by Riparian Forests and
 Wetlands in an Undisturbed Headwaters Watershed.  In Riparian Ecosystems and
 Their Management.  Tucson, AZ, April 16-18, 1985, pp. 175-179.

 Suter, G.W. II. 1990. Endpoints for regional ecological risk  assessments.
 Environmental Management,  14:9-23.

 USEPA 1992.  Compendium of Watershed Scale Models for TMDL Development.
 U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency, Office of Water, Washington, D.C.
 841-R-94-002.

 USEPA. 1994.  Water Quality Standards Handbook:  Second Edition.
 EPA-823-B-94-005a.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Office of Water.
 Washington, D.C.

 USEPA, 1990. Water Quality Standards for Wetlands. National Guidance.
 EPA/44015-90-011.

 van der Valk, A.G. and Jolley.   1992.  Recommendations for research to develop
 guidelines for the use of wetlands to control rural nonpoint source pollution.
Ecological  Engineering 1 (1992): 115-134.

 van der Valk, A.G., J.M. Rhymer, and  H.R. Murkin.  1991. Flooding and the
Decomposition of Litter of Four Emergent Plant Species in a Prairie Wetland.
 Wetlands 11(1): 1-16.
                                                              References    83

-------
           Walbridge, M.W., George Mason University, Fairfax, VA.  1993, Functions and
           Values of Forested Wetlands in the Southern United States.  Journal of Forestry
           91(5): 15-.
84     An Overview of Available Endpoints and Assessment Tools

-------